Owners Manual
07/06/28 20:15:44 31SAA610 0002 Main Menu
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2008 Honda Fit was a wise investment.
It will give you years of driving pleasure.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
you can refer to it at any time.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a
symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual
helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staff
is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle.
Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer
any questions and concerns.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
i
07/06/28 20:15:48 31SAA610 0003 Main Menu
Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure
of any airbag system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
ii
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:15:58 31SAA610 0004 Main Menu
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
and one of
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
iii
2008 Fit Online Reference Owner's Manual
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety .............................................................................................................................. iii
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) .................................................................................................... 3
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) .................................................... 5
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, dashboard, steering wheel, and other convenience items) ............. 57
Features (climate control, audio, security, and cruise control) .................................................................. 101
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading) ...................................................................... 135
Driving (engine and transmission operation) ................................................................................................ 151
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)........................................... 177
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, fuses) ..................................... 217
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls) ....................................... 241
Warranty and Customer Relations (U. S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information) ... 257
Authorized Manuals (U. S. only) (how to order) ......................................................................................... 261
Index ............................................................................................................................... ........................................ I
Service Information Summary ( fluid capacities and tire pressures)
31SAA610
1
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:16:26 31SAA610 0007 Main Menu
Overview of Contents
Contents
A convenient reference to the
sections in this manual.
Your Vehicle at a Glance
A quick reference to the main
controls in your vehicle.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important information about the
proper use and care of your vehicle’s
seat belts, an overview of the
supplemental restraint system, and
valuable information on how to
protect children with child restraints.
Instruments and Controls
Explains the purpose of each
instrument panel indicator and gauge,
and how to use the controls on the
dashboard and steering column.
Features
How to operate the heating and air
conditioning system, the audio
system, and other convenience
features.
2
Before Driving
What gasoline to use, how to breakin your new vehicle, and how to load
luggage and other cargo.
Driving
The proper way to start the engine,
shift the transmission, and park.
Maintenance
The maintenance minder shows you
when you need to take your vehicle
to the dealer for maintenance service.
There is also a list of things to check
and instructions on how to check
them.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers several problems
motorists sometimes experience,
and details how to handle them.
Technical Information
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Warranty and Customer
Relations
(U.S. and Canada only)
A summary of the warranties
covering your new vehicle, and how
to contact us for any reason. Refer to
your warranty manual for detailed
information.
Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
How to order manuals and other
technical literature.
Index
Service Information Summary
A summary of the information you
need when you pull up to the fuel
pump.
07/06/28 20:16:33 31SAA610 0008 Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.74)
Your Vehicle at a Glance
DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG (P.9, 25)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS (P.60)
GAUGES (P.67)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.107)
PASSENGER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
(P.9, 31)
MIRROR CONTROLS*
(P.95)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH*
(P.79)
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
(P.102)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCH
(P.94)
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
(P.138)
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
(P.31)
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET PARKING BRAKE
(P.96)
(P.99)
A/T model is shown.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (P.157)
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (P.155)
* : If equipped
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
07/06/28 20:16:40 31SAA610 0009 Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
PADDLE SHIFTER
(DOWNSHIFT)*2
(P.162)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
(P.74)
PADDLE SHIFTER
(UPSHIFT)*2
(P.162)
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.71)
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/
FOG LIGHTS*2
(P.72)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
(P.74)
MIRROR CONTROLS*2
(P.95)
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.31)
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
(P.138)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
(P.99)
HORN*1
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT
(P.75)
*1 :
*2 :
4
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.74)
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS*2 (P.131)
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
If equipped.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK*2
(P.127)
07/06/28 20:16:44 31SAA610 0010 Main Menu
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 7
Seat Belts ........................................ 8
Airbags ............................................ 9
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 11
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 11
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 12
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 13
5. Fasten and Position the
Seat Belts .............................. 14
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position ................................. 15
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16
Additional Safety Precautions .... 17
Additional Information About
Your Seat Belts ........................ 18
Seat Belt System Components ... 18
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 19
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 20
Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 20
Additional Information About
Your Airbags ............................ 22
Airbag System Components ....... 22
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 25
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 28
How Your Side Curtain
Airbags Work ........................... 30
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 30
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 31
How the Passenger Airbag
Off Indicator Works ................ 31
Airbag Service .............................. 32
Additional Safety Precautions .... 33
Protecting Children − General
Guidelines ................................. 34
All Children Must Be
Restrained ................................ 34
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
All Children Should Sit in a
Back Seat .................................. 35
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 35
If You Must Drive with Several
Children .................................... 37
If a Child Requires Close
Attention ................................... 37
Additional Safety Precautions .... 38
Protecting Infants and Small
Children .................................... 39
Protecting Infants ........................ 39
Protecting Small Children .......... 40
Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 41
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 42
With LATCH ................................ 43
With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 45
With a Tether ............................... 47
Protecting Larger Children ............ 49
Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 49
Using a Booster Seat ................... 50
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front .......................................... 51
Additional Safety Precautions .... 52
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 53
Safety Labels .................................... 54
5
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
07/06/28 20:16:54 31SAA610 0011 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
The recommendations on this page
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page 14 ).
Restrain All Children
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
small children should be restrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages 34 − 52 ).
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Don’t Drink and Drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
6
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
Control Your Speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page 179 ).
07/06/28 20:17:01 31SAA610 0012 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
(3)
(11)
(7)
(5)
(2)
(6)
(8) (10)
(2)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(11) Door Locks
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
a proper position and always wear
your seat belts. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
can take an active role in protecting
yourself and your passengers.
7
Driver and Passenger Safety
(1)
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
(9)
(4)
07/06/28 20:17:12 31SAA610 0013 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Why Wear Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
8
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
What You Should Do:
Always wear your seat belt, and
make sure you wear it properly.
07/06/28 20:17:20 31SAA610 0014 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
25 for more information on how
your front airbags work).
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page 28 for more
information on how your side airbags
work).
In addition, your vehicle has side
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver, front passenger,
and passengers in the outer rear
seating positions during a moderate
to severe side impact (see page
30 for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
07/06/28 20:17:26 31SAA610 0015 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions.
What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
10
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
07/06/28 20:17:36 31SAA610 0016 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
See pages 34 − 38 for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
1.Close and Lock the Doors
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors and the
tailgate are closed and locked.
2.Adjust the Front Seats
Driver and Passenger Safety
Introduction
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front.
Your vehicle has a door and
tailgate open indicator on
the instrument panel to indicate
when any door or the tailgate is not
tightly closed.
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Locking the doors and the tailgate
also helps prevent an outsider from
unexpectedly opening a door or the
tailgate when you come to a stop.
See page 79 for how to lock the
doors, and page 62 for how the door
and tailgate open indicator works.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
CONTINUED
11
07/06/28 20:17:44 31SAA610 0017 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down (see
page 75 ).
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
12
3.Adjust the Seat-Backs
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
See page 86 for how to adjust the
front seats.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seatbacks should also adjust their seatback to a comfortable, upright
position.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:17:52 31SAA610 0018 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See page 87 for how to adjust the
seat-backs.
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the center of the back of your head
rests against the center of the
restraint.
Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page 87 for how to adjust the
head restraints.
13
Driver and Passenger Safety
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
When a passenger is seated in the
rear center seating position, make
sure the center head restraint is
properly positioned.
07/06/28 20:18:00 31SAA610 0019 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
5.Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
The seat belt in the center position
of the back seat can be unlatched
and retracted to allow the back seat
to be folded up or down. This seat
belt should be latched whenever the
seat-back is in an upright position.
See page 93 for how to unlatch and
relatch the seat belt.
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
14
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
07/06/28 20:18:08 31SAA610 0020 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause
If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat
RELEASE BUTTONS
The front seats have adjustable seat
belt anchors. To adjust the height of
an anchor, squeeze the two release
buttons, and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
See page 18 for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
15
Driver and Passenger Safety
very serious injuries in a crash.
6.Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and head restraints, and
put on their seat belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
upright, well back in their seats, with
their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
07/06/28 20:18:14 31SAA610 0021 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
Advice for Pregnant Women
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
16
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
07/06/28 20:18:22 31SAA610 0022 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
Additional Safety Precautions
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers. If your
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts. Devices intended to improve
very seriously injured in a crash.
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
the belt and increase the chance of
serious injury in a crash.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Never let passengers ride in the
area in front of a folded-up rear
seat or on top of a folded-down
rear seat. If they do, they could be
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers. Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door. If a side airbag or a
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
17
Driver and Passenger Safety
Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a foldeddown back seat. If they do, they
07/06/28 20:18:31 31SAA610 0023 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all five seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
This system uses the same sensors
as the front airbags to monitor
whether the front seat belts are
latched or unlatched, and how much
weight is on the front passenger’s
seat (see pages 27 and 28 ).
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
18
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s) touching the rear of
the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
07/06/28 20:18:40 31SAA610 0024 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page 14 for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat (see page 45 ).
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
DETACHABLE ANCHOR
The lap/shoulder belt in the center
seating position on the rear seat is
equipped with a detachable seat belt
that has two parts: a small latch plate
and an anchor buckle.
The detachable seat belt should
normally be latched whenever the
seat-backs are in an upright position.
For more information about the
detachable seat belt, see page 93 .
19
Driver and Passenger Safety
Lap/Shoulder Belt
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
07/06/28 20:18:49 31SAA610 0025 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The tensioners are designed to
activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy.
If a side airbag or side curtain airbag
deploys during a side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle
will also deploy.
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.
20
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat Belt Maintenance
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
203 ). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
Honda provides a limited warranty
on seat belts. See your Honda
Warranty Information booklet for
details.
07/06/28 20:18:53 31SAA610 0026 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Driver and Passenger Safety
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by your dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
21
07/06/28 20:18:58 31SAA610 0027 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
(8)
(2)
(10)
(9)
(13)
(5)
(1)
(3)
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag
(6)
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(12)
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(11) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(12) Outer Lap Tensioners
(13) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
22
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(4)
(11)
(5)
(4)
(7)
07/06/28 20:19:05 31SAA610 0028 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Your airbag system includes:
(14)
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 28 ).
(15)
(16)
(16)
(15)
(14) Side Curtain Airbags
(15) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(16) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
30 ).
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
23
Driver and Passenger Safety
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 25 ).
07/06/28 20:19:14 31SAA610 0029 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page 20 ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact or
side impact.
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the control
unit to turn the airbag off (see
page 29 ).
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and the front
passenger’s seat belt are latched
or unlatched (see page 18 ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
27 ).
24
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs
(29 kg) or less (the weight of an
infant or small child), the
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page 27 ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page 30 ).
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page 31 ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page 31 ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
07/06/28 20:19:23 31SAA610 0030 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Front Airbags Work
Driver and Passenger Safety
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will instantly
inflate the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags, at the time and
with the force needed.
Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page 27 ).
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
25
07/06/28 20:19:31 31SAA610 0031 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
may experience some temporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
Dual-Stage Airbags
Dual-Threshold Airbags
Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
Your front airbags are also dualthreshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
sensors detect the occupant is
wearing a seat belt or not.
In a more severe crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a less severe crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
26
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
If the occupant’s belt is latched, the
airbag will deploy at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
07/06/28 20:19:41 31SAA610 0032 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Advanced Airbags
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any objects or metal items
under the front seats.
Back-seat passengers should not
put their feet under the front seats.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.
Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off. CONTINUED
27
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbagcaused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
07/06/28 20:19:49 31SAA610 0033 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
When the airbag is turned off, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page 31 ).
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag will be off. However, the
passenger airbag off indicator will
not come on.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly, do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
This includes:
A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
28
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.
How Your Side Airbags Work
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
Moving the front seat or seat-back
forcibly back against the folded
rear seat.
If your vehicle has optional floor
mats, make sure the mat behind the
front passenger’s seat is hooked to
the floor mat anchor (see page 203 ).
If it is not, the mat may interfere
with the proper operation of the
sensors and operation of the seat.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the affected side.
07/06/28 20:19:57 31SAA610 0034 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Side Airbag Cutoff System
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front passenger’s
seat.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, if the
position sensors detect a child has
leaned into the side airbag’s
deployment path, the airbag will shut
off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page 31 ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
29
Driver and Passenger Safety
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
07/06/28 20:20:06 31SAA610 0035 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
How the SRS Indicator Works
The SRS indicator alerts
you to a potential problem
with your airbags or seat belt
tensioners.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on briefly then goes off. This
tells you the system is working
properly.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or
flashes on and off while you drive.
30
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:20:15 31SAA610 0036 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works
U.S.
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
Canada
This indicator
alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does not
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on briefly and then go
off (see page 61 ). If it doesn’t come
on, stays on, or comes on while
driving without a passenger in the
front seat, have the system checked.
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
U.S.
Canada
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
31
Driver and Passenger Safety
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them.
07/06/28 20:20:25 31SAA610 0037 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.
The passenger airbag off indicator
may come on and off repeatedly if
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.
If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object hanging on the seat or
in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s), such as a foldeddown back seat, that are touching
the rear of the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
Airbag Service
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
Do not try to remove or replace
any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
32
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:20:31 31SAA610 0038 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact. Even if your
Do not attempt to deactivate your
airbags. Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid. If water or
another liquid soaks into a seatback, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Do not cover or replace front seatback covers without consulting
your dealer. Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
Do not remove or modify a front
seat without consulting your
dealer. This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
33
Driver and Passenger Safety
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts worn during a crash to
make sure they are operating
properly.
Additional Safety Precautions
07/06/28 20:20:39 31SAA610 0039 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of the death of children aged 12 and
under.
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to properly protect child
passengers.
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
34
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be properly
restrained when they ride in a
vehicle.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle (see pages 39 − 48 ).
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly (see pages 49 − 52 ).
07/06/28 20:20:48 31SAA610 0040 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Children who ride in back are less
likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off (see page 31 ),
please follow these guidelines:
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag. If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag. Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt (see page 49 for important
information about protecting larger
children).
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
35
Driver and Passenger Safety
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat. The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration and
Transport Canada recommend that
all children aged 12 and under be
properly restrained in a back seat.
Some states have laws restricting
where children may ride.
07/06/28 20:21:01 31SAA610 0041 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
U.S. Models
DASHBOARD
SUN VISORS
Canadian Models
SUN VISORS
36
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:21:09 31SAA610 0042 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page 49 ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page 86 ).
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in a back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
Have the child sit upright and well
back in the seat (see page 15 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
14 ).
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
37
Driver and Passenger Safety
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children, and a child must ride in
front:
07/06/28 20:21:17 31SAA610 0043 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Additional Safety Precautions
Never hold an infant or child on
your lap. If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child. During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
38
Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is activated,
and the belt is fully retracted and
locked. If a child wraps a loose
seat belt around their neck, they
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages 45 and 46 for how to
activate and deactivate the
lockable retractor.)
Use the childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
rear doors. This can prevent
children from accidentally falling
out (see page 80 ).
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle. Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For example, infants and small
children left in a vehicle on a hot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
Lock all doors and the tailgate
when your vehicle is not in use.
Children who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles.
Keep vehicle keys/remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children. Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the tailgate,
which can lead to accidental injury
or death.
07/06/28 20:21:27 31SAA610 0044 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front. Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rearfacing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving their seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking their
seat-back in the desired position.
Child Seat Type
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
It could also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
39
Driver and Passenger Safety
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rearfacing, reclining mode.
07/06/28 20:21:35 31SAA610 0045 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Protecting Infants and Small Children
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Placement
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
Child Seat Type
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
A child who is at least one year old,
and who fits within the child seat
maker’s weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forwardfacing, upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a fivepoint harness system as shown.
40
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
07/06/28 20:21:45 31SAA610 0046 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
If it is necessary to put a forwardfacing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forwardfacing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
Selecting a Child Seat
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the lower anchors and tethers for
children (LATCH) system.
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the two outer
seating positions in the back seat.
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCHcompatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
1. The child seat should meet U.S. or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
2. The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
Rear-facing for infants, forwardfacing for small children.
3. The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.
41
Driver and Passenger Safety
Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page 31 ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
07/06/28 20:21:52 31SAA610 0047 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
1. Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle. All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (lower anchors and
tethers for children) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
3. Secure the child in the child seat.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rearfacing child seats.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
42
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Make sure the child is properly
strapped in the child seat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
07/06/28 20:22:01 31SAA610 0048 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
BUTTON
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
LOWER ANCHORS
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
1. Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
2. Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
Rigid type
3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
43
Driver and Passenger Safety
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers
for children) at the outer rear seats.
07/06/28 20:22:09 31SAA610 0049 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
ANCHOR
TETHER STRAP HOOK
Flexible type
Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connector as
shown above.
4. Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
44
5. Route the tether strap over the
seat-back and through the head
restraint legs.
6. Attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
8. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
07/06/28 20:22:17 31SAA610 0050 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
If you intend to install a child seat in
the center seating position of the
rear seat, remove its head restraint,
and make sure the detachable seat
belt is securely latched (see page
93 ).
1. With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
2. To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
45
Driver and Passenger Safety
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
07/06/28 20:22:22 31SAA610 0051 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
To deactivate the lockable retractor
and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
4. After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
5. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
46
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:22:31 31SAA610 0052 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
Using an Outer Anchor
ANCHOR
ANCHOR
Driver and Passenger Safety
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat.
Each rear outside seating position
has an anchorage point on the seatback, and the center seating position
has an anchorage point in the ceiling
near the tailgate.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
TETHER STRAP HOOK
1. After properly securing the child
seat (see page 45 ), route the
tether strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
2. Attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the tether
strap is not twisted.
3. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
47
07/06/28 20:22:38 31SAA610 0053 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
Using the Center Anchor
ANCHOR
ANCHOR
COVER
1. Remove the rear center head
restraint, and store it in a safe
place.
2. After properly securing the child
seat (see page 45 ), open the
anchor cover.
48
TETHER STRAP HOOK
3. Route the tether strap over the
seat-back, then attach the tether
strap hook to the anchor, making
sure the tether strap is not twisted.
4. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:22:46 31SAA610 0054 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder
belt.
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Driver and Passenger Safety
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
49
07/06/28 20:22:54 31SAA610 0055 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Protecting Larger Children
3. Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Using a Booster Seat
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
5. Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat.
50
Some states and Canadian provinces
also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend
to drive.
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
35 ) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.
A child who has outgrown a forwardfacing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:23:02 31SAA610 0056 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Protecting Larger Children
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
Physical Size
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages 14 and 49 ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
Maturity
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
51
Driver and Passenger Safety
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
07/06/28 20:23:11 31SAA610 0057 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Protecting Larger Children
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rearmost position.
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck. This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
Supervise the child. Even a mature
child sometimes needs to be
reminded to fasten the seat belt or
sit properly.
52
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt. Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
07/06/28 20:23:19 31SAA610 0058 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the
underside.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
With the tailgate open, airflow can
pull exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
tailgate open, open all the windows
and set the heating and cooling
system as shown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system as follows:
1. Select the fresh air mode.
mode.
2. Select the
3. Turn the fan on high speed.
4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
53
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.
07/06/28 20:23:31 31SAA610 0059 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
SUN VISORS
U.S. models
Canadian models
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
DASHBOARD
U.S. models only
54
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:23:45 31SAA610 0060 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Safety Labels
HOOD
RADIATOR CAP
U.S. models
DOORJAMBS
U.S. models
Canadian models
Driver and Passenger Safety
Canadian models
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
55
07/06/28 20:23:47 31SAA610 0061 Main Menu
56
Table Of Contents
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:23:51 31SAA610 0062 Main Menu
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Power Windows ............................... 94
Mirrors .............................................. 95
Parking Brake .................................. 96
Interior Convenience Items ............ 97
Beverage Holders ........................ 98
Glove Box ..................................... 98
Accessory Power Socket ............ 99
Sun Visor....................................... 99
Interior Lights .................................. 99
57
Instruments and Controls
Control Locations ............................ 58
Instrument Panel ............................. 59
Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 60
Gauges .............................................. 67
Trip Meter .................................... 67
Odometer ...................................... 68
Fuel Gauge ................................... 68
Check Fuel Cap Indicator ........... 68
Maintenance Minder ................... 69
Controls Near the Steering
Wheel ............................................ 70
Windshield Wipers and Washers .. 71
Turn Signals and Headlights .......... 72
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 74
Hazard Warning Button .................. 74
Rear Window Defogger .................. 74
Steering Wheel Adjustment ........... 75
Keys and Locks ................................ 76
Immobilizer System......................... 77
Ignition Switch ................................. 78
Door Locks ....................................... 79
Power Door Locks ....................... 79
Childproof Door Locks ............... 80
Tailgate ............................................. 81
Remote Transmitter ........................ 83
Seats .................................................. 86
07/06/28 20:23:57 31SAA610 0063 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Control Locations
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS (P.60)
GAUGES (P.67)
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
(P.74)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.107)
MIRROR CONTROLS*
(P.95)
POWER DOOR
LOCK MASTER
SWITCH*
(P.79)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCH
(P.94)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.138)
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
(P.102)
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.31)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
(P.99)
* : If equipped
58
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
PARKING BRAKE
(P.96)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
(P.157)
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
(P.155)
07/06/28 20:24:05 31SAA610 0064 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Instrument Panel
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.60, 232)
SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR (P.18, 60)
TPMS INDICATOR* (P.64)
LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.62)
DOOR AND TAILGATE OPEN INDICATOR (P.62)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR* (P.66)
LOW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATOR* (P.64)
HIGH TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
(P.63)
WASHER LEVEL INDICATOR* (P.65)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
LAMP (P.231)
ELECTRIC POWER
STEERING INDICATOR
(P.62)
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.60, 230)
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR
(P.60, 230)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.66)
LOW TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
(P.63)
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR* (P.65)
LIGHTS ON
INDICATOR
(P.64)
FOG LIGHT INDICATOR*
(P.64)
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LIGHTS
INDICATOR*
(P.65)
SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
(P.31, 61)
CRUISE MAIN
INDICATOR* (P.65)
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
(P.66)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.30, 61)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.62)
* : If equipped
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
59
Instruments and Controls
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.65)
07/06/28 20:24:15 31SAA610 0065 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many
indicators that give you important
information about your vehicle.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
See page 231 .
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running. For
more information, see page 230 .
Charging System
Indicator
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For more information,
see page 230 .
60
U.S.
Canada
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Red)
This indicator has two functions:
1. It comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. A beeper
sounds if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.
2. If it remains on after you have
fully released the parking brake
while the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page 232 .
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
A beeper also sounds if you have not
fastened your seat belt.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belts, the beeper sounds,
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belts before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
07/06/28 20:24:23 31SAA610 0066 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
U.S.
Canada
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates that the
passenger’s side airbag has
automatically shut off. For more
information, see page 31 .
61
Instruments and Controls
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. For more
information, see page 18 .
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates a
potential problem with your front
airbags. This indicator will also alert
you to a potential problem with your
side airbags, passenger’s side airbag
cutoff system, side curtain airbags,
automatic seat belt tensioners,
driver’s seat position sensor, or the
front passenger’s weight sensors.
For more information, see page 30 .
07/06/28 20:24:32 31SAA610 0067 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem with the
ABS. If this happens, have your
vehicle checked at a dealer. With
this indicator on, your vehicle still
has normal braking ability but no
anti-lock function. For more
information, see page 168 .
Electric Power Steering
(EPS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on
when you turn the ignition to the ON
(II) position and goes off after the
engine starts. If it comes on at any
other time, there is a problem in the
electric power steering system. If
this happens, stop the vehicle in a
safe place and turn off the engine.
Reset the system by restarting the
engine. The indicator will not turn
off immediately. If it does not go off
after driving a short distance, or
comes on again while driving, take
the vehicle to your dealer to have it
checked. With the indicator on, the
EPS may be turned off, making the
vehicle harder to steer.
If the power steering system
overheats while driving, the assist is
reduced and steering may feel
slightly harder.
62
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving with the power steering
system continuously overheating can
cause system damage.
Low Fuel Indicator
This indicator comes on as a
reminder that you must refuel soon.
When the indicator comes on, there
is about 1.7 US gal (6.3 ) of fuel
remaining in the tank before the
needle reaches E. There is a small
reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
when the needle does reach E.
Door and Tailgate Open
Indicator
This indicator comes on if any door
or the tailgate is not closed tightly.
07/06/28 20:24:40 31SAA610 0068 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
Low Temperature
Indicator
This indicator monitors the
temperature of the engine coolant. If
there is no problem, this indicator
comes on when the engine is cold. If
it comes on when the engine is warm
(normal operating temperature),
have the vehicle inspected by your
dealer as soon as possible.
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see page 198 ). Replace
the bulb as soon as possible, since
other drivers cannot see that you are
signaling.
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
63
Instruments and Controls
High Temperature
Indicator
This indicator monitors the
temperature of the engine coolant. It
normally comes on when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and goes off after a few
seconds. In normal driving
conditions, this indicator should not
blink or stay on. In severe driving
conditions, such as very hot weather
or a long period of uphill driving, this
indicator may blink. This means the
engine coolant temperature is high.
If the indicator begins to blink while
you are driving, be sure to slow down
to prevent overheating. If the
indicator stays on, pull safely to the
side of the road and turn off the
engine. See page 228 for instructions
and precautions on checking the
engine’s cooling system.
Do not drive the vehicle while the
indicator is on or the engine may be
damaged.
07/06/28 20:24:49 31SAA610 0069 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
U.S. models only
U.S. models only
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost the pressure, and determine
the cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare (see page 218 ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service
(see page 238 ). For more
information, see page 170 .
64
If this indicator comes on and stays
on at any other time, or if it does not
come on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, there
is a problem with the TPMS. With
this indicator on, the low tire
pressure indicator will not come on
when a tire loses pressure. Take the
vehicle to your dealer to have the
system checked.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Lights On Indicator
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or
position. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will stay on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open
the driver’s door.
Fog Light Indicator
On Sport model
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the fog lights. For more
information, see page 73 .
07/06/28 20:25:00 31SAA610 0070 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
High Beam Indicator
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page 73 .
Washer Level Indicator
On Sport model and Canadian LX model
Canadian models only
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button (see
page 131 ).
This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
come on (see page 192 ).
Cruise Control Indicator
On Sport model and Canadian LX model
Daytime Running Lights
Indicator
Canadian models only
If this indicator comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position and the parking brake is
released, it means there is a problem
in the circuit. Have your vehicle
checked by your dealer.
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
131 for information on operating the
cruise control.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
65
Instruments and Controls
On Canadian models, this indicator
comes on with reduced brightness
when the daytime running lights
(DRL) are on (see page 73 ).
Cruise Main Indicator
07/06/28 20:25:09 31SAA610 0071 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
Maintenance Minder
Indicator
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It
reminds you that it is time to take
your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance. The maintenance main
items and sub items will be displayed
in the information display. See page
179 for more information on the
maintenance minder.
This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the
required maintenance service.
66
Immobilizer System
Indicator
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It will
go off if you have inserted a
properly-coded ignition key. If it is
not a properly-coded key, the
indicator will blink and the engine
will not start (see page 77 ).
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from the ON (II) position to
the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Security System Indicator
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
On Sport model
This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. See page
130 for more information on the
security system.
07/06/28 20:25:17 31SAA610 0072 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Gauges
SELECT/RESET KNOB
TACHOMETER
SPEEDOMETER
TRIP METER
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays by pressing the select/reset
knob repeatedly.
Each trip meter works independently,
so you can keep track of two
different distances.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the last
selection is displayed.
ODOMETER
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the select/reset
knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
INFORMATION DISPLAY
U.S. model is shown.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
67
Instruments and Controls
FUEL GAUGE
Trip Meter
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
07/06/28 20:25:24 31SAA610 0073 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Gauges
Odometer
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial
regulations to disconnect, reset, or
alter the odometer with the intent to
change the number of miles or
kilometers indicated.
Fuel Gauge
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount. The needle
returns to the bottom after you turn
off the ignition.
Check Fuel Cap Indicator
If your fuel fill cap is loose or
missing, a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’
message appears as text on the
information display after you start
the engine. The message appears
from CHECK to FUEL, then to CAP
repeatedly.
Turn the engine off and confirm the
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
the cap, then retighten it until it
clicks at least once. You can cycle
the message off of the display by
pressing the select/reset knob
repeatedly, but this message will be
displayed each time the engine is
started. It will take several days of
normal driving for the vehicle to turn
the warning off.
Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
68
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the system still detects a loose or
missing fuel fill cap, the malfunction
indicator lamp (MIL) comes on.
Turn the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL goes
out after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If it does not go out, have
your dealer inspect the vehicle. For
more information, see page 231 .
07/06/28 20:25:28 31SAA610 0074 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
Maintenance Minder
The information display in the
instrument panel shows you the
engine oil life and maintenance
service items when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. This
information helps to keep you aware
of the periodic maintenance your
vehicle needs for continued troublefree driving. Refer to page 179 for
more information.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
69
07/06/28 20:25:35 31SAA610 0075 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
PADDLE SHIFTER (DOWNSHIFT)*2
(P.162)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
(P.74)
PADDLE SHIFTER (UPSHIFT)*2
(P.162)
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
(P.74)
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/
FOG LIGHTS*2
(P.72)
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.71)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
(P.74)
MIRROR CONTROLS*2
(P.95)
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
(P.31)
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
(P.138)
HORN*1
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
(P.75)
*1 :
*2 :
70
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS*2
(P.131)
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
If equipped.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
(P.99)
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK*2
(P.127)
07/06/28 20:25:46 31SAA610 0076 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wiper
MIST − The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
Rear Window Wiper and Washer
OFF − The wipers are not activated.
LO − The wipers run at low speed.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
1. MIST
2. OFF
3. INT − Intermittent
4. LO − Low speed
5. HI − High speed
6. Windshield washers
Windshield Washers − Pull the
wiper control lever toward you,
and hold it. The washers spray
until you release the lever. The
wipers run at low speed, then
complete one more sweep after
you release the lever.
1. OFF
When you turn the wiper switch to
the ‘‘OFF’’ position, the wiper will
return to its parked position.
2. Rotate the switch clockwise to
turn the rear window wiper ON.
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
71
Instruments and Controls
INT − The wipers operate every
few seconds.
07/06/28 20:25:53 31SAA610 0077 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signal and Headlights
3. Hold past ON to turn the rear
window wiper on and to spray the
rear window washer.
Turn Signal and Headlights
4. Rotate the switch
counterclockwise to spray the
window washer.
The rear window washer uses the
same fluid reservoir as the windshield washer.
1. Turn signal
2. Off
3. Parking and interior lights
4. Headlights
5. High beams
6. Flash high beams
On Sport model
7. Fog lights off
8. Fog lights on
72
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Turn Signal − Push down on the
left lever to signal a left turn and up
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever and
hold it. The lever will return to the
center when you release it or
complete a turn.
07/06/28 20:26:02 31SAA610 0078 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Headlights
Headlights − Turning the switch to
the ‘‘
’’ position turns on the
parking lights, taillights, instrument
panel lights, side-marker lights, and
rear license plate lights.
When the light switch is in the
‘‘
’’ or ‘‘
’’ position, the
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder. This indicator stays on if
you leave the light switch on and
turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position.
If you leave the lights on with the
key removed from the ignition
switch, you will hear a reminder
chime when you open the driver’s
door.
To flash the high beams, pull the
lever back lightly, then release it.
The high beams will stay on as long
as you hold the lever back.
Fog Lights
On Sport model
Turn the fog lights on and off by
turning the switch next to the
headlight switch.
Daytime Running Lights
Canadian models only
With the headlight switch off or in
the
position, the high beam
headlights and the high beam
indicator come on with reduced
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
You can use the fog lights only when
the headlights are on low beam.
They will go off when the headlights
are turned off.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
73
Instruments and Controls
Turning the switch to the ‘‘
’’
position turns on the headlights.
High Beams − Push the lever
forward and the high beam indicator
will come on (see page 65 ). Pull it
back to return to low beams.
07/06/28 20:26:10 31SAA610 0079 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger
Instrument Panel Brightness
Hazard Warning Button
Rear Window Defogger
Push the button to turn on the
hazard warning lights (four-way
flashers). This causes all four
outside turn signals and both turn
indicators in the instrument panel to
flash. Use the hazard warning lights
if you need to park in a dangerous
area near heavy traffic, or if your
vehicle is disabled.
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The indicator in
the button comes on to show the
defogger is on. You must manually
shut off the rear window defogger
when it is no longer needed.
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL KNOB
You can change the instrument panel
brightness only when the light
switch is on.
Turn the knob on the upper part of
the instrument panel to adjust the
brightness.
You will hear a beep when maximum
or minimum brightness is reached.
You will also hear a beep when the
maximum level is canceled by
turning the knob a click to the left.
74
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:26:19 31SAA610 0080 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Rear Window Defogger, Steering Wheel Adjustment
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
Instruments and Controls
The defogger wires on the inside of
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side-to-side.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
1. Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
3. Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in position.
4. Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up and down.
2. Move the steering wheel so it
points toward your chest, not
toward your face. Make sure you
can see the instrument panel
gauges and indicators.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
75
07/06/28 20:26:27 31SAA610 0081 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Keys and Locks
On Sport model
KEY NUMBER TAG KEYS WITH
TRANSMITTER
All models except Sport
KEY NUMBER TAG
KEYS
You should have received a key
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Your vehicle comes with the two
ignition keys.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
All models except Sport
The keys do not contain batteries.
Do not try to take them apart.
76
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:26:35 31SAA610 0082 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly-coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine’s fuel
system is disabled.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undrivable.
If you have lost your key and cannot
start the engine, contact your dealer.
Always take the ignition key with you
whenever you leave the vehicle alone.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you insert the key.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
77
Instruments and Controls
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on for
a few seconds, then go off. If the
indicator starts to blink, it means the
system does not recognize the
coding of the key. Turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position,
remove the key, reinsert it, and turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position again.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
07/06/28 20:26:43 31SAA610 0083 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Ignition Switch
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
LOCK (0) − You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, push it in slightly. If
your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must
also be in park.
78
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the LOCK (0) or
the ACCESSORY (I) position and
open the driver’s door. Remove the
key to turn off the beeper.
ACCESSORY (I) − You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power socket in this
position.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must be
in Park before you can remove the
key from the ignition switch.
ON (II) − This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
START (III) − Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Removing the key from the
ignition switch while driving
locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
Remove the key from the
ignition switch only when
parked.
07/06/28 20:26:51 31SAA610 0084 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Door Locks
Power Door Locks
TAB
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Instruments and Controls
UNLOCK
LOCK
Each door has a lock tab on the top
of the door. Push in the tab to lock
the door, and pull it out to unlock.
All models except Sport
Each front door can be locked or
unlocked with the ignition key.
On Canadian DX model
To lock the passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, push in the
lock tab and close the door. To lock
the driver’s door, pull and hold the
outside door handle, then push in the
lock tab. Release the handle, then
close the door.
All models except Canadian DX
To lock the doors and the tailgate,
push the top of the master door lock
switch on the driver’s door, push in
the lock tab on the driver’s door, or
use the key in the outside door lock
on the driver’s door.
Pushing the bottom of the master
door lock switch unlocks all doors
and the tailgate.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
79
07/06/28 20:26:58 31SAA610 0085 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Door Locks
The lock tab on each passenger’s
door locks and unlocks only that
door. Pulling up the driver’s lock tab
only unlocks the driver’s door. To
unlock only the driver’s door from
the outside, turn the key and release
it. If you turn it again, the remaining
doors and the tailgate unlock.
To lock a passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, push in the
lock tab and close the door. To lock
the driver’s door, remove key from
ignition switch and push in the lock
tab or push the top of the master
door lock switch, then close the door.
80
Lockout Prevention
With the driver’s door open and the
key in the ignition switch, the master
door lock switch is disabled. It is not
disabled if the driver’s door is closed.
If you try to lock the open driver’s
door with the key in the ignition
switch by pushing in the lock tab, the
tabs on all doors pop up when you
close the door.
Childproof Door Locks
LEVER
Unlock
Lock
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position, the door
cannot be opened from inside
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, pull the lock
tab up, and use the outside door
handle.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:27:04 31SAA610 0086 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Tailgate
All models except Canadian DX
The tailgate will lock or unlock when
you lock or unlock the driver’s door
by using the key, the lock tab on the
driver’s door, the master door lock
switch or the remote transmitter (if
equipped).
UNLOCK
HANDLE
KEY
All models except Sport
You can lock or unlock the tailgate
with the key.
To open the tailgate, pull the handle,
then lift up.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
81
Instruments and Controls
LOCK
07/06/28 20:27:12 31SAA610 0087 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Tailgate
Unlocking the Tailgate
Lock
TAILGATE
HANDLE
To close the tailgate, hold the
tailgate handle, lower the tailgate,
then press down on the back edge.
Keep the tailgate closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
from getting into the interior. See
Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page
53 .
82
Unlock
On Sport model
If the power door lock system cannot
unlock the tailgate, unlock it
manually.
Place a cloth on the edge of the
cover, then use a small flat-tipped
screwdriver to remove the cover on
the back of the tailgate.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Push the release lever to the right as
shown.
If you need to unlock the tailgate
manually, it means there is a
problem with the tailgate. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
07/06/28 20:27:19 31SAA610 0088 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Remote Transmitter
LED
LOCK
BUTTON
UNLOCK
BUTTON
On Sport model
LOCK − Press this button once to
lock all doors and the tailgate. Some
exterior lights will flash once. When
you push LOCK twice within 5
seconds, the horn will sound to
verify that the doors and the tailgate
are locked and the security system
has set. You cannot lock the doors
and the tailgate if any door or the
tailgate is not fully closed or the key
is in the ignition switch.
The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
switch is in the door activated
position) will come on when you
press the UNLOCK button. If you do
not open any door or the tailgate
within 30 seconds, the light fades out.
If you relock the doors and the
tailgate with the remote transmitter
before 30 seconds have elapsed, the
light will go off immediately.
PANIC − Press this button for
about 2 seconds to attract attention:
the horn will sound, and the exterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel panic mode, press any
other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If you do not open any door or the
tailgate within 30 seconds, they will
automatically relock and the security
system will set.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
83
Instruments and Controls
PANIC
BUTTON
UNLOCK − Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
twice to unlock the remaining doors
and the tailgate. Some exterior lights
will flash twice each time you press
the button.
07/06/28 20:27:27 31SAA610 0089 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Remote Transmitter
Remote Transmitter Care
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
Replacing the Transmitter
Battery
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors
and the tailgate, replace the battery
as soon as possible.
Battery type: CR1616
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
SCREW
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
84
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:27:35 31SAA610 0090 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Remote Transmitter
4. Remove the old battery, and insert
a new battery into the back of the
cover with the + side facing down.
TAB
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations
for battery disposal.
5. Install the parts in reverse order.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
2. Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
3. Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
85
Instruments and Controls
BATTERY
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
07/06/28 20:27:42 31SAA610 0091 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Seats
Front Seat Adjustments
See pages 11 − 13 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seatbacks.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
LEVER
To adjust the seat forward and
backward, pull up on the lever under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position, and
release the lever. Try to move the
seat to make sure it is locked in
position.
86
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
The seat can also be adjusted
forward and backward using the
lever on the side of the seat-back.
Pull out the lever and push it forward,
holding the seat-back with your hand.
Move the seat to the desired position,
and check the seat to make sure it is
locked in position.
07/06/28 20:27:50 31SAA610 0092 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Seats
Rear Seat Adjustments
Head Restraints
See page 13 for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.
LEVER
To change the seat-back angle of the
front seat, pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat bottom.
Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
You can adjust the angle of the rear
seat-backs separately. To change the
seat-back angle, pull up the release
lever on the outer side of the seatback.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
87
Instruments and Controls
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
07/06/28 20:27:55 31SAA610 0093 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Seats
RELEASE
BUTTON
The head restraints in the rear outer
seating positions do not adjust for
height. To remove one for cleaning
or repair, push the release button,
and lift the restraint up.
Failure to reinstall the head
restraints can result in severe
injury during a crash.
FRONT
They are most effective when you
adjust them so the center of the back
of the occupant’s head rests against
the center of the restraint.
88
The front head restraints adjust for
height. You need both hands to
adjust a restraint. Do not attempt to
adjust it while driving. To raise it,
pull upward. To lower the restraint,
push the release button sideways,
and push the restraint down.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Always replace the head
restraints before driving.
07/06/28 20:28:03 31SAA610 0094 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Seats
Reclining the Front Seats
RELEASE BUTTON
When a passenger is seated in the
rear center seating position, make
sure the center head restraint is
properly positioned.
Make sure the head restraint locks
in position when you reinstall it.
SEAT-BACK ANGLE
ADJUSTMENT LEVER
You can recline the seat-backs on the
front seats so they are level with the
rear seat cushions, making a large
cushioned area. To do this:
Instruments and Controls
REAR CENTER
SLIDE LEVER
2. Remove the front head restraints
(see page 88 ), and store them
securely.
1. Recline the rear seat-backs as far
backward as possible (see page
87 ).
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
89
07/06/28 20:28:11 31SAA610 0095 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Seats
3. Using the slide lever, move the
front seat cushions as far forward
as possible.
4. Pull up the seat-back angle
adjustment lever, and pivot the
seat-back backward until it is level
with the rear seat cushion.
Folding the Rear Seat Up
The left and right rear seat cushions
can be lifted up separately to make
room for cargo.
Remove any items from the seat
before you fold up the seat cushion.
Reverse this procedure to return the
front seats to the upright position.
When you return the seat-back to its
upright position, hold the seat-back
to keep it from going up too quickly.
Pull up the rear seat cushion, and
fold the seat leg down. Push the seat
cushion firmly against the seat-back
to lock it.
Make sure you install the head
restraints and securely lock the seats
before driving.
90
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:28:20 31SAA610 0096 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Seats
LEG
Folding the Rear Seat Down
The rear seat-backs can be folded
down for more cargo room.
LATCH PLATE
Remove any items from the seat
before folding down the seat-back.
FLOOR GUIDE
LATCH
Make sure there are no items on the
floor before folding down the seats.
To return the seat cushion to its
original position, first make sure
there are no items on the floor, then
pull up the seat leg fully, and push
down the seat cushion slowly while
holding it with your hands. Set the
seat leg in the floor guide. A latch
comes out when the leg is set
properly.
When you fold down the driver’s side
rear seat, use the latch plate to
release the center seat belt from the
detachable anchor (see page 93 ).
Allow the seat belt to retract into the
holder on the ceiling, and store the
buckles in it.
1. Move the front seat cushions as
far forward as possible.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
91
Instruments and Controls
Each side folds down separately, so
you can still carry a passenger in the
rear outer seating position.
07/06/28 20:28:29 31SAA610 0097 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Seats
RELEASE LEVER
2. Make sure the rear outer head
restraint is locked in place. If you
fold down the driver’s side seatback, also adjust the rear center
head restraint to its lowest
position.
5. Move the front seat backward to
the desired position. Make sure
the seat is locked in place.
To return the seat-back to its upright
position, move the front seat forward
again, then lift up the seat-back.
Do not put any heavy items on the
seat-back when it is folded down.
While lifting the seat-back, the seat
cushion may come up with it. To
secure the seat cushion, see page 91 .
Make sure that the folded down rear
seat does not interfere with the front
passenger’s seat-back. This will
cause the front passenger’s weight
sensors and the front passenger’s
seat belt reminder indicator to work
improperly (see pages 18 and 31 ).
Also check the passenger airbag off
indicator to assure proper operation
of the passenger’s front airbag.
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo
on page 146 ).
3. Pull up the release lever on the
outside of the seat-back.
4. Fold the seat-back forward.
92
Make sure the seat-back and seat
cushion are locked securely and all
rear shoulder belts are positioned in
front of the rear seat-backs. In the
center seating position of the rear
seat, be sure the detachable anchor
is latched securely before using the
seat belt (see page 93 ).
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:28:38 31SAA610 0098 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Seats
Detachable Anchor
The seat belt in the rear center seat
is equipped with a detachable anchor.
SMALL LATCH
PLATE
LATCH PLATE
Using a seat belt with the
detachable anchor unlatched
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash.
Before using the seat belt,
make sure the detachable
anchor is correctly latched.
TRIANGLE
MARKS
SMALL LATCH PLATE
Pull out the small latch plate and the
latch plate from each holding slot in
the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt
to extend it.
ANCHOR BUCKLE
Line up the triangle marks on the
small latch plate and anchor buckle
when reattaching the belt and buckle.
Tug on the seat belt to verify that
the detachable anchor is securely
latched. Make sure the seat belt is
not twisted.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
93
Instruments and Controls
This allows the center seat belt to be
unlatched when the driver’s side rear
seat is folded.
07/06/28 20:28:45 31SAA610 0099 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Seats, Power Windows
ANCHOR BUCKLE
Power Windows
DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH
LATCH PLATE
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
MAIN SWITCH
To unlatch the detachable anchor,
insert the latch plate into the slot on
the side of the anchor buckle. Store
the detachable anchor and seat belt
latch plates in the retractor housing.
94
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open the window, push
the switch down and hold it. Release
the switch when you want to stop the
window. To close the window, pull
back on the switch and hold it.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AUTO − To open the driver’s
window fully, push the window
switch firmly down to the second
detent, and release it. The window
will automatically go down all the
way. To stop the window, pull back
on the window switch briefly.
To close the window, pull back on
the switch and hold it.
07/06/28 20:28:53 31SAA610 0100 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Power Windows, Mirrors
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
TAB
SELECTOR SWITCH
Instruments and Controls
When you push the MAIN switch in,
the switch is off, and the passenger
windows cannot be raised or lowered.
To cancel this feature, push on the
switch again to get it to pop out.
Keep the MAIN switch off when you
have children in the vehicle so they
do not injure themselves by
operating the windows
unintentionally.
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
Keep the inside and outside mirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
All models except Canadian DX
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
95
07/06/28 20:29:00 31SAA610 0101 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Mirrors, Parking Brake
3. Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirror right, left, up, or down.
Parking Brake
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound
if the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.
4. When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake
indicator on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released (see page 60 ).
96
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:29:05 31SAA610 0102 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
COAT HOOK
FRONT DOOR POCKET
VANITY MIRROR
SUN VISOR
COIN TRAY
SEAT-BACK POCKET
PASSENGER’S
TRAY
REAR SIDE POCKET
(RIGHT SIDE)
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
GLOVE BOX
97
Instruments and Controls
CENTER POCKET
07/06/28 20:29:11 31SAA610 0103 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
Beverage Holders
Glove Box
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door pocket beverage
holders when you open or close the
doors. Use only resealable
containers in the door pockets.
Open the glove box by pushing the
button. Close it with a firm push.
Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
98
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:29:22 31SAA610 0104 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Interior Convenience Items, Interior Lights
Accessory Power Socket
This socket is intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
DOOR ACTIVATED
ON
OFF
If you leave any door open without
the key in the ignition switch, the
ceiling light will go off after 3
minutes.
It will not power an automotive type
cigarette lighter element.
Sun Visor
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
When using the sun visor for the
side window, remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing it out.
The ceiling light (with the switch in
the door activated position) comes
on when you remove the key from
the ignition switch. If you do not
open a door, the light fades out in
about 30 seconds.
The ceiling light has a three-position
switch; ON, Door Activated, and
OFF. In the Door Activated (center)
position, the light comes on when
you:
Open any door.
Unlock the doors and the tailgate
with the key or the remote
transmitter (if equipped).
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
99
Instruments and Controls
To use the accessory power socket,
pull up the cover. The ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position.
After all doors are closed tightly, the
light fades out in about 30 seconds.
Ceiling Light
07/06/28 20:29:25 31SAA610 0105 Main Menu
100
Table Of Contents
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:29:30 31SAA610 0106 Main Menu
Features
The heating and air conditioning
system in your vehicle provides a
comfortable driving environment in
all weather conditions.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The security system helps to discourage vandalism and theft of your
vehicle.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
101
Features
The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them.
Vents, Heating, and A/C .............. 102
Playing the AM/FM Radio ........... 107
AM/FM Radio Reception ............. 112
Playing a Disc ..................................114
Disc Player Error Messages ........ 123
Protecting Your Discs ................... 124
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 127
Radio Theft Protection.................. 128
Setting the Clock ........................... 129
Security System ............................. 130
Cruise Control ................................ 131
07/06/28 20:29:33 31SAA610 0107 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON*
FRESH AIR/RECIRCULATION
LEVER
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
FAN CONTROL DIAL
U.S. model is shown.
* : If equipped
102
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
BUTTON
MODE CONTROL DIAL
07/06/28 20:29:51 31SAA610 0108 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Airflow Controls
Fan Control Dial
Turn this dial to increase or decrease
the fan speed and airflow.
The system should be left in fresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
If equipped
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. The
indicator in the button is on when
the A/C is on.
Fresh Air/Recirculation Lever
This lever controls the source of the
air going into the system. When you
slide the lever to the
side, air is
brought in from outside the vehicle
(fresh air mode). When you select
the
side, air from the vehicle’s
interior is sent through the system
again (recirculation mode).
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
Rear Window Defogger Button
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page 74 ).
Mode Control Dial
Use the mode control dial to select
the vents the air flows from. Some
air will flow from the dashboard
corner vents in all modes.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and defroster vents at
the base of the windshield.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
When you select
or
,
the system automatically turns on
the A/C (if equipped). You cannot
turn the A/C off in this mode.
103
Features
Temperature Control Dial
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
07/06/28 20:30:02 31SAA610 0109 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Ventilation
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then discharges
it through vents near the tailgate.
1. Set the temperature to the lower
limit.
2. Make sure the A/C is off.
and
.
3. Select
4. Set the fan to the desired speed.
Using the Heater
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.
and
.
1. Select
2. Set the fan to the desired speed.
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
Using the A/C
If equipped
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Check the high
temperature indicator (see page
63 ). If the indicator begins to blink,
turn off the A/C until the indicator
goes off.
1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. The indicator in the button
comes on when a fan speed is
selected.
2. Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
.
3. Select
4. If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select
.
5. Set the fan to the desired speed.
If the interior is very warm, you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
A/C, and setting the fan to
maximum speed in
.
104
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:30:10 31SAA610 0110 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Dehumidify the Interior
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry and
can prevent the windows from
fogging up.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
1. Set the fan to the desired speed or
high for faster defrosting.
2. Select
by sliding the lever.
3. Select
. The system
automatically turns on the A/C
(if equipped). The A/C indicator
will not come on if it was
previously off.
4. Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
to help clear the
5. Select
rear window.
6. To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When you select
or
,
the system automatically turns on
the A/C. This helps to dehumidify
the air and to defog the windshield.
In either mode, you cannot turn off
the A/C. When you switch to
another mode, the A/C returns to its
original setting, either on or off, as
indicated by the A/C indicator.
105
Features
1. Turn the fan on.
2. If the A/C is off, turn it on (if
equipped).
3. Select
and
.
Adjust the temperature to your
preference.
To Defog and Defrost
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
07/06/28 20:30:17 31SAA610 0111 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
1. Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.
2. Select
. The system
automatically turns on the A/C (if
equipped). The A/C indicator does
not come on if it was previously off.
3. Select
.
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel below each vent.
This sends more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select fresh air
mode to avoid fogging the windows.
To Turn Everything Off
Turning the fan speed control dial all
the way to the left shuts the system
off.
Keep the system off for short
periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
106
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:30:24 31SAA610 0112 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Sport model
All models except Sport
PRESET BUTTONS
AM BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
AUTO SELECT
BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
AUTO SELECT
BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
Features
SOUND BUTTON
SEEK BAR
TUNE BAR
SOUND BUTTON
SEEK BAR
TUNE BAR
AM/FM BUTTON
FM BUTTON
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
107
07/06/28 20:30:35 31SAA610 0113 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio
To Play the AM/FM Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM
button (AM or FM button except
Sport model). Adjust the volume by
turning the same knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button (AM or FM button). On the
FM band, ST will be displayed if the
station is broadcasting in stereo.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not
available.
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
108
TUNE − Use the TUNE bar to tune
to a desired frequency. Press the
side of the bar to tune to a
higher frequency, and the
side
to tune to a lower frequency.
If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
and play it for 10 seconds. When it
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
SEEK − The seek function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the
or
side of the
SEEK bar, then release it.
PRESET − Each preset button
(1−6) can store one station on AM,
and two stations on FM.
SCAN − The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
twelve stations.
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Pick a preset number (1−6), and
hold it until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
07/06/28 20:30:46 31SAA610 0114 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
Adjusting the Sound
Press the SOUND button repeatedly
to display the equalizer (EQ) [Sport
only], bass, treble, fader, balance,
and speed-sensitive volume
compensation (SVC) settings.
BASS − Adjusts the bass.
Features
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A. SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
that preset button.
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble.
To turn off auto select, press the
A. SEL (auto select) button. This
restores the presets you originally
set.
For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
112 .
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-toside strength of the sound.
Each mode is shown in the display as
it changes. Turn the PWR/VOL
knob to adjust the setting to your
liking. When the level reaches the
center, you will see a ‘‘
’’ in the
display.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
109
07/06/28 20:30:56 31SAA610 0115 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio
SVC − Adjusts the volume level
based on the vehicle speed.
On Sport model
EQ − Selects the sound equalizer
settings.
The system will return to the audio
display about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
Equalizer Settings (EQ)
On Sport model
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
You can select any of five equalizer
settings. The equalizer adjusts the
frequency ranges to suit the music
or your personal listening
preferences.
The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the PWR/VOL knob to
adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
NORMAL − The sound spectrum is
leveled out for most types of music
and general listening preferences.
This function is set to MID as the
default setting when the vehicle
leaves the factory.
BEATS − Emphasizes the low end
of the sound spectrum.
VOCAL − Emphasizes the middle
end of the sound spectrum.
SMOOTH − Emphasizes the high
end of the sound spectrum.
GROOVE − Emphasizes the low
and high ends of the entire spectrum
for a ‘‘powerful’’ sound.
110
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:31:00 31SAA610 0116 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Features
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page 74 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the system is turned
off.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
111
07/06/28 20:31:08 31SAA610 0117 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
AM/FM Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequencies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
112
Radio Reception
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
station drifting in and out. If you are
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations, or hear only the station you
are close to.
07/06/28 20:31:14 31SAA610 0118 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
AM/FM Radio Reception
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
113
Features
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
07/06/28 20:31:21 31SAA610 0119 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Playing a Disc
Sport model
All models except Sport
CD SLOT
CD EJECT BUTTON
CD BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
REPEAT
SCAN BUTTON
BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
DISC EJECT
BUTTON
DISC SLOT
REPEAT
SCAN BUTTON
BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
SEEK/SKIP BAR
CD BUTTON
DISP BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
114
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
FOLDER BAR
07/06/28 20:31:31 31SAA610 0120 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Playing a Disc
To Play a CD
All models except Sport
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
You operate the CD player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
select the CD player, press the CD
button. The number of the track
playing is shown in the display. The
system will continuously play a CD
until you change modes.
To play the radio when a CD is
playing, press the AM or FM button.
Press the CD button again to switch
back to the CD player.
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot. The drive will pull the CD in
the rest of the way and begin to play
it. When the system reaches the end
of the disc, it will return to the
beginning and play the disc again.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition
switch, the disc will stay in the drive.
When you turn the system back on,
the CD will begin playing where it
left off.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the
or
side.
SEEK − To move rapidly within a
track, press and hold the SEEK/
SKIP bar. Press and hold
to
move forward. Press and hold
to move backward. Release the
bar when the system reaches the
point you want.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
115
Features
To load or play CDs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON(II) position.
To Change or Select Tracks
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release the
side, to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
track.
07/06/28 20:31:37 31SAA610 0121 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Playing a Disc
REPEAT − To continuously replay
a track, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. Press it again to turn it off.
RANDOM − This feature plays the
tracks in random order. To activate
random play, press and release the
RDM button. You will see RDM in
the display. Press it again to return
to normal play.
SCAN − The scan function samples
all the tracks on the disc in the order
they are recorded on the CD. To
activate it, press the SCAN button.
You will see SCAN in the display.
You will get a 10 second sampling of
each track on the CD. Press the
SCAN button again to get out of the
system and play the last track
sampled.
116
To Stop Playing a CD
Press the eject button (
) to
remove the CD. If you eject the CD,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the CD after 10 seconds and put it in
pause mode. To begin playing, press
the CD button.
Press the AM or FM button to
switch to the radio while a CD is
playing. To play the CD, press the
CD button.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition switch, the disc will stay in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the disc will begin playing
where it left off.
07/06/28 20:31:45 31SAA610 0122 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Playing a Disc
To Play a Disc
On Sport model
To load or play discs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
The disc player can also play CD-Rs
and CD-RWs compressed in CDTEXT, MP3, and WMA formats.
When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA,
you will see ‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ in the
display. You can see up to 99 folders,
and select up to 255 tracks/files.
Video CDs and DVDs will not work
in this unit.
The specifications of the compatible
WMA file are:
Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz
Bit rate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192
kbps
Compatible with variable bit rate and
multi-session.
Maximum layers (including ROOT):
8 layers
The specifications of the compatible
MP3 file are:
Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz
(MPEG1), 24, 22.05, 16 kHz
(MPEG2)
Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1), 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/
64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps
(MPEG2)
Compatible with variable bit rate and
multi-session.
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
117
Features
You operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
select the disc player, press the CD
button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the
display. The number of the track
playing is shown in the display. The
system will continuously play a disc
until you change modes.
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays FORMAT, and then skips to
the next file.
07/06/28 20:31:53 31SAA610 0123 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Playing a Disc
To Load a Disc
Name Display Function
Insert the disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
in the rest of the way and begin to
play it. When the system reaches the
end of the disc, it will return to the
beginning and play the disc again.
Each time you press the DISP button
while playing a CD-TEXT, the
display mode changes from album
name, to track name, to artist name,
and then to normal display. When
playing a disc in MP3/WMA, the
display mode changes from folder
name, to file name, to artist tag, to
album tag, to track tag, and then to
normal display.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
To play the AM/FM radio when a
disc is playing, press the AM/FM
button. Press the CD button again to
switch back to the disc player.
If the title is too long, it will not show
all at once. Press and hold the DISP
button, and the rest of the title will
show in the display.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
118
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
You will also see the album/track
name (CD-TEXT), or the folder/file
name (MP3/WMA) under these
conditions:
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
Each time a new track, file, or
folder plays, other than in normal
display mode.
07/06/28 20:32:01 31SAA610 0124 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Playing a Disc
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar
while a disc is playing to select
passages and change tracks (files in
MP3/WMA mode).
In MP3/WMA mode
FOLDER SELECTION − To
select a different folder, press the
left or right side of the FOLDER bar.
Press the
side to skip to the
next folder, and the
side to
move to the beginning of the current
folder. Press it again to skip to the
previous folder.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the
or
side of the
SEEK/SKIP bar.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
119
Features
In MP3/WMA mode, use the
FOLDER bar to select folders in the
disc, and use the SEEK/SKIP bar to
change files.
SEEK/SKIP − Each time you
press and release the
side, the
player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track (files in
MP3/WMA mode). Press and
release the
side to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
track.
07/06/28 20:32:06 31SAA610 0125 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Playing a Disc
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT) − To continuously replay
a track (file in MP3/WMA mode),
press and release the RPT button.
You will see RPT in the display.
Press and hold the RPT button to
turn it off.
In MP3/WMA mode
FOLDER-REPEAT − This feature,
when activated, replays all the files
on the selected folder in the order
they are compressed in MP3/WMA.
To activate folder repeat mode, press
the RPT button repeatedly until you
see F-RPT in the display. The system
continuously replays the current
folder. Press and hold the RPT
button to turn it off.
Each time you press and release the
RPT button, the mode changes from
file repeat to folder repeat, then to
normal playing.
120
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
RANDOM − This feature plays the
tracks within a disc in random order.
In MP3/WMA mode, all files in all
folders are played in random order.
To activate random mode, press the
RDM button repeatedly until you see
RDM in the display. Press and
release the RDM button again to
return to normal play.
07/06/28 20:32:12 31SAA610 0126 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Playing a Disc
In MP3/WMA mode
SCAN − The scan function samples
all the tracks/files on the disc in the
order they are recorded on the disc.
To activate the scan feature, press
the SCAN button. You will see SCAN
in the display. You will get a 10
second sampling of each track on the
disc. You will also see a track/file
name in the display. Press and hold
the SCAN button to get out of the
system and play the last track
sampled.
Each time you press and release the
RDM button, the mode changes
from folder random play, to within a
disc random play, then to normal
play.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
In MP3/WMA mode
F-SCAN − This feature, when
activated, samples the first file of
each folder for 10 seconds. To
activate the folder scan feature,
press the SCAN button repeatedly
until you see F-SCAN in the display.
The folder name is also displayed.
To hear the rest of the folder, press
the SCAN button, within 10 seconds.
If you do not, the system advances to
the next folder, plays 10 seconds of it,
and continues throughout the rest of
the folder the same way. When the
system samples the first file of all
folders, F-SCAN is cancelled, and the
system plays normally.
121
Features
FOLDER-RANDOM − This
feature, when activated, plays the
files in the current folder in random
order, rather than in the order they
are compressed in MP3/WMA. To
activate folder random play, press
the RDM button. You will see
F-RDM in the display. The system
will then select and play files
randomly. This continues until you
deactivate folder random play by
pressing and holding the RDM
button.
07/06/28 20:32:18 31SAA610 0127 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Playing a Disc
To Stop Playing a Disc
Press the eject button (
) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
it after 10 seconds and put it in pause
mode. To begin playing, press the
CD button.
Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
124 .
Press the AM/FM button to switch
to the radio while a disc is playing.
Press the CD button to play the disc.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition switch, the disc will stay in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the disc will begin playing
where it left off.
122
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:32:24 31SAA610 0128 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Disc Player Error Messages
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
Error Massage
High temperature
HEAT ERROR
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Track/File format not
supported
FORMAT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL PUSH
EJECT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL
Mechanical Error
Servo Error
Solution
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 125). Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
123
Features
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For the additional information on
damaged discs, see page 125 .
Cause
07/06/28 20:32:34 31SAA610 0129 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Protecting Your Discs
General Information
When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,
use only high quality discs labeled
for audio use.
When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the
system.
Play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped discs may jam in the
drive or cause other problems.
Handle your discs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
124
Protecting Discs
When a disc is not being played,
store it in its case to protect it from
dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
direct sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
A new disc may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the
recording surface of the disc,
causing skipping or other problems.
Remove these pieces by rubbing the
inner and outer edges with the side
of a pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc player.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Handle a disc by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
These, along with contamination
from finger prints, liquids, and felttip pens, can cause the disc to not
play properly, or possibly jam in the
drive.
07/06/28 20:32:44 31SAA610 0130 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Protecting Your Discs
Examples of these discs are shown
to the right:
1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick discs
With Label/
Sticker
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
2. Damaged discs
Chipped/
Cracked
Using Printer
Label Kit
Sealed
With Plastic
Ring
3. Poor quality discs
Warped
Burrs
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
125
Features
Additional Information of
Recommended Discs
The in-dash disc player has a
sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
may become stuck inside and
damage the audio unit.
07/06/28 20:32:54 31SAA610 0131 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Protecting Your Discs
4. Small, irregular shaped discs
3-inch (8-cm) CD
5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs
Triangle Shape
Fingerprints, scratches, etc.
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due
to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the
discs may cause the sound to skip.
Can Shape
126
Arrow Shape
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.
Audio unit may not play the
following formats.
07/06/28 20:32:59 31SAA610 0132 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Auxiliary Input Jack
U.S. Sport and all Canadian models
Features
The auxiliary input jack is
underneath the accessory power
socket in the center pocket. The
system will accept auxiliary input
from standard audio accessories.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the jack, press the AUX
button to select it.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
127
07/06/28 20:33:04 31SAA610 0133 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Radio Theft Protection
Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific five-digit code in the
preset buttons. Because there are
hundreds of number combinations
possible from five digits, making the
system work without knowing the
exact code is nearly impossible.
You should have received a card that
lists your audio system’s code and
serial numbers. It is best to store this
card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from a dealer. To
do this, you will need the system’s
serial number.
128
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
radio fuse is removed, the audio
system will disable itself. If this
happens, you will see ‘‘ENTER
CODE’’ in the frequency display the
next time you turn on the system.
Use the preset buttons to enter the
code. The code is on the radio code
card included in your owner’s
manual kit. When it is entered
correctly, the radio will start playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have 10 tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in 10 attempts, you
must then leave the system on for 1
hour before trying again.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:33:12 31SAA610 0134 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Setting the Clock
All models except Sport
Sport model
CLOCK
CLOCK
Features
Press and hold the CLOCK
(SOUND) button until you hear a
beep. The displayed time begins to
blink. Change the hours by pressing
the H (preset 4) button until the
numbers advance to the desired time.
Change the minutes by pressing the
M (preset 5) button until the
numbers advance to the desired time.
Press the CLOCK (SOUND) button
again to enter the set time.
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time
is before the half hour, press the
CLOCK (SOUND) button until
you hear a beep, then press the R
(preset 6) button to set the clock
back to the previous hour. If the
displayed time is after the half
hour, the clock sets forward to the
beginning of the next hour.
RESET
CLOCK BUTTON
BUTTON
(SOUND)
H BUTTON
M BUTTON
RESET
CLOCK BUTTON
BUTTON
(SOUND)
H BUTTON
M BUTTON
For example:
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:53 will reset to 2:00
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
129
07/06/28 20:33:19 31SAA610 0135 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Security System
The security system will not set if
the hood, tailgate, or any door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the door and tailgate open
indicator on the instrument panel
(see page 62 ) to see if the doors and
tailgate are fully closed. Since it is
not part of the monitor display,
manually check the hood.
On Sport model
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, position lights, side
marker lights and taillights flashes if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle or remove the audio unit.
This alarm continues for 2 minutes,
then the system resets. To reset an
alarming system before the 2
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s door with the key or the
remote transmitter.
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and the tailgate. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doors and the tailgate from the
outside with the key, driver’s lock
tab, door lock master switch, or
remote transmitter. The security
system indicator on the instrument
panel starts blinking immediately to
show you the system is setting itself.
130
SECURITY SYSTEM
INDICATOR
Once the security system is set,
opening any door, the tailgate, or the
hood without using the key or the
remote transmitter, will cause it to
alarm. It also alarms if the radio is
removed from the dashboard or the
wiring is cut.
The alarm will also be activated if
the passenger inside the locked
vehicle turns the ignition switch on.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: To see if the system is set
after you exit the vehicle, press the
LOCK button on the remote
transmitter within 5 seconds. If the
system is set, the horn will beep
once.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
07/06/28 20:33:28 31SAA610 0136 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Cruise Control
On Sport model and Canadian LX
model
CRUISE BUTTON
RES/ACCEL
BUTTON
DECEL/SET
BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
1. Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE
MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
NOTE: The main switch can be left
on, even when the system is not in
use.
3. Press and release the SET/
DECEL button on the steering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down. This will cancel cruise
control. To resume the set speed,
press the RES/ACCEL button. The
indicator on the instrument panel will
come back on.
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshift to hold the set speed.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
131
Features
Cruise control allows you to maintain
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Using the Cruise Control
07/06/28 20:33:36 31SAA610 0137 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
To increase your speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, the vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
132
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake or clutch pedal
lightly with your foot. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator on
the instrument panel goes out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the DECEL/
SET button.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake or
clutch pedal causes the cruise
control to cancel.
07/06/28 20:33:45 31SAA610 0138 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Cruise Control
Tapping either of the paddle shifters
shifts the gear up or down, but does
not cancel the cruise control. For
more information on driving with
paddle shifters, see page 162 .
Canceling Cruise Control
CRUISE BUTTON
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system off and erases the
previous cruising speed.
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
133
Features
CANCEL
BUTTON
Resuming the Set Speed
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
system will remember the previously
set cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h), and then press and
release the RES/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
on. The vehicle will accelerate to the
same cruising speed as before.
07/06/28 20:33:47 31SAA610 0139 Main Menu
134
Table Of Contents
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:33:51 31SAA610 0140 Main Menu
Before Driving
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Break-in Period .............................. 136
Fuel Recommendation .................. 136
Service Station Procedures .......... 137
Refueling..................................... 137
Opening and Closing
the Hood ................................. 138
Oil Check .................................... 139
Engine Coolant Check .............. 140
Fuel Economy ................................ 141
Accessories and Modifications .... 144
Carrying Cargo .............................. 146
135
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
07/06/28 20:34:00 31SAA610 0141 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Avoid hard braking for the first
200 miles (300 km).
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
Fuel Recommendation
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
We recommend using quality
gasolines containing detergent
additives that help prevent fuel
system and engine deposits.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
136
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
your authorized dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10 % ethanol by
volume and up to 15 % MTBE by
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-related
information, please refer to your
Quick Start Guide.
07/06/28 20:34:08 31SAA610 0142 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Service Station Procedures
Refueling
1. Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
ATTACHMENT
2. Outside of the vehicle, open the
fuel fill door by pulling its notched
edge.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
TETHER
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Put the
attachment on the fuel fill cap into
the slit on the fuel fill door.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
137
Before Driving
FUEL FILL CAP
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapor from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
07/06/28 20:34:16 31SAA610 0143 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Service Station Procedures
Opening and Closing the Hood
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
LATCH
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
the malfunction indicator lamp
may come on (see page 231 ). You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display.
1. Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle under the lower left
corner of the dashboard. The
hood will pop up slightly.
If the hood latch handle moves
stiffly, or if you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.
6. Close the fuel fill door.
138
2. Put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood near the center.
Slide your hand to the left until
you feel the hood latch handle.
Push this handle up to release it.
Lift up the hood.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:34:26 31SAA610 0144 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Service Station Procedures
Oil Check
DIPSTICK
GRIP
SUPPORT ROD
LOWER MARK
CLIP
3. Holding the grip, pull the support
rod out of its clip. Insert the end
into the designated hole in the
hood.
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
4. Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see Adding Engine Oil on page 187 .
3. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into its hole.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
139
Before Driving
UPPER MARK
07/06/28 20:34:31 31SAA610 0145 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Service Station Procedures
Engine Coolant Check
MAX
RESERVE TANK
Refer to Owner’s Maintenance
Checks on page 184 for
information about checking other
items on your vehicle.
MIN
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 190 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
140
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:34:40 31SAA610 0146 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Fuel Economy
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel
Economy Estimates Comparison.
Fuel economy is not a fixed number.
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments.
City MPG − Represents urban
driving in a vehicle in light traffic. A
range of miles per gallon achieved is
also provided.
Highway MPG
Combined Fuel
Economy
Estimated Annual
Fuel Cost
(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
achieved is also provided.
Combined Fuel Economy −
Represents a combination of city and
highway driving. The scale
represents the range of combined
fuel economy for other vehicles in
the class.
Highway MPG − Represents a
mixture of rural and interstate
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle,
typical of longer trips in free-flowing
traffic. A range of miles per gallon
Estimated Annual Fuel Cost −
Provides an estimated annual fuel
cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
km) per year multiplied by the cost
per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost
data) divided by the combined fuel
economy.
For more information on fuel
economy ratings and factors that
affect fuel economy, visit www.
fueleconomy.gov (Canada: Visit www.
vehicles.gc.ca)
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
141
Before Driving
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shown in the example to the right
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA
estimates include:
City MPG
07/06/28 20:34:52 31SAA610 0147 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy Factors
The following factors can lower your
vehicle’s fuel economy:
Aggressive driving (hard
acceleration and braking)
Excessive idling, accelerating and
braking in stop-and-go traffic
Cold engine operation (engines
are more efficient when warmed
up)
Driving with a heavy load or the
air conditioner running
Improperly inflated tires
Use the recommended viscosity
motor oil, displaying the API
Certification Seal (see page
187).
Maintain proper tire inflation
− An under-inflated tire increases
‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces
fuel economy.
Avoid carrying excess weight in
your vehicle − It puts a heavier
load on the engine, increasing fuel
consumption.
Drive Efficiently
Drive moderately − Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking increase fuel
consumption.
Observe the speed limit −
Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
on fuel mileage at speeds above 45
mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
speed and you reduce the drag.
Trailers, car top carriers, roof
racks and bike racks are also big
contributors to increased drag.
Improving Fuel Economy
Vehicle Maintenance
A properly maintained vehicle
maximizes fuel economy. Poor
maintenance can significantly reduce
fuel economy. Always maintain your
vehicle according to the maintenance
messages displayed on the
information display (see Owner’s
Maintenance Checks on page 184 ).
For example:
142
Keep your vehicle clean − In
particular, a build-up of snow or
mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
economy.
Always drive in the highest gear
possible − If your vehicle has a
manual transmission, you can
boost your fuel economy by up
shifting as early as possible.
Avoid excessive idling − Idling
results in 0 miles per gallon.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:35:02 31SAA610 0148 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Fuel Economy
Minimize the use of the air
conditioning system − The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible.
Miles
driven
Gallons
of fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100
Liter
Kilometers
Before Driving
Plan and combine trips −
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.
Checking Your Fuel Economy
L per
100 km
Calculating Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking
fuel gauge readings are NOT
accurate measures of fuel economy.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles.
1) Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
2) Reset trip counter to zero.
3) Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
4) Follow one of the simple calculations above.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
143
07/06/28 20:35:10 31SAA610 0149 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any
modifications or add any accessories,
be sure to read the following
information.
Accessories
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability.
144
Before installing any accessory:
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and
tire pressure monitoring system (if
equipped).
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page 234 ) or interfere with
the proper operation of your
vehicle.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. Accessories installed in
these areas may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
07/06/28 20:35:17 31SAA610 0150 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components, with
non-Honda components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Here are some examples:
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
* : If equipped
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Before Driving
Lowering the vehicle with a nonHonda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Non-Honda wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS)*.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
145
07/06/28 20:35:26 31SAA610 0151 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Carrying Cargo
FRONT DOOR POCKETS
CENTER POCKET
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Glove box
Front door pockets
Seat-back pocket
Center pocket
Cargo area side pocket
Cargo area, including the rear
seats when folded up or down.
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
CARGO AREA
REAR SIDE POCKET
(RIGHT SIDE)
146
SEAT-BACK POCKET
GLOVE BOX
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:35:36 31SAA610 0152 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits (Payload)
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S. vehicles,
and 395 kg for Canadian vehicles.
Label Example
See Tire And Loading Information
label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
(2)Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
147
Before Driving
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if
you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit −
(1)Locate the statement ‘‘The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s
placard.
07/06/28 20:35:48 31SAA610 0153 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Carrying Cargo
(4)The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.
(1,400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
148
Example 1
Max Load (850 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(550 lbs)
Max Load (850 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(250 lbs)
Max Load (850 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(100 lbs)
Example 2
Example 3
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both
are on a label on the driver’s
doorjamb.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:35:55 31SAA610 0154 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Cargo in the Passenger
Compartment
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the cargo area, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
Do not stack items higher than the
back of the rear seats. They can
block your view and be thrown
around the vehicle during a crash.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the
tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page 53 .
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
149
Before Driving
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
underneath and interfere with the
proper operation of the seats, the
sensors under the seats, or the
driver’s ability to operate the
pedals.
If you fold the rear seats up or
down, tie down items that could be
thrown about the vehicle during a
crash or sudden stop. Also, keep
all cargo below the bottom of the
windows. If it is higher, it could
interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.
07/06/28 20:36:00 31SAA610 0155 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Carrying Cargo
Optional Separation Net
The separation net can be used to
hold back soft, lightweight items
stored in the cargo area. Heavy
items should be properly secured on
the floor of the cargo area. The net
may not prevent heavy items from
being thrown forward in a crash or a
sudden stop.
HOOK
The four hooks on the floor can be
used to install a net for securing
items.
150
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:36:03 31SAA610 0156 Main Menu
Driving
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
manual and automatic transmissions.
It also includes important
information on parking your vehicle,
the braking system, and the tire
pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)*.
* : If equipped
151
Driving
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving Guidelines ......................... 152
Preparing to Drive ......................... 153
Starting the Engine........................ 154
Manual Transmission.................... 155
Automatic Transmission............... 157
Driving with the Paddle
Shifters (Sport only).................. 162
Parking ............................................ 166
Braking System.............................. 167
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 168
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)* ....................... 170
Towing a Trailer ............................ 173
07/06/28 20:36:08 31SAA610 0157 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Driving Guidelines
On Sport model
Your vehicle is designed to give you
optimum handling and performance
on well-maintained roads. As part of
this design, your vehicle has a
minimum of ground clearance.
Use caution if you ever drive your
vehicle on very rough or rutted
roads. You could damage the
suspension and underbody by
bottoming out. Going too fast over
parking lot ‘‘speed bumps’’ can
also cause damage.
152
Curbs and steep inclines could
damage the front and rear
bumpers. Low curbs that do not
affect the average vehicle may be
high enough to hit the bumper on
your vehicle. The front or rear
bumper may scrape when trying to
drive onto an incline, such as a
steep driveway or trailer ramps.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:36:18 31SAA610 0158 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
5. Check the seat adjustment (see
page 86 ).
6. Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page 95 ).
7. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 75 ).
2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
4. Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
8. Make sure the doors and the
tailgate are securely closed and
locked.
Driving
3. Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure (see page 209 ).
9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page 14 ).
10. When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel (see page 59 ).
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
153
07/06/28 20:36:27 31SAA610 0159 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
3. Manual transmission:
Press the clutch pedal down all the
way. The START (III) position
does not function unless the clutch
pedal is pressed.
Automatic transmission:
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperlycoded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
more inf ormation, see page 77 .
5. If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
154
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6. If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
07/06/28 20:36:32 31SAA610 0160 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Manual Transmission
Come to a full stop before you shift
into reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into
reverse with the vehicle moving.
Push down the clutch pedal, and
pause for a few seconds before
shifting into reverse, or shift into one
of the forward gears for a moment.
This stops the gears so they won’t
‘‘grind.’’
Use extra care when driving on
slippery surfaces.
When slowing down, you can get
extra braking from the engine by
shifting to a lower gear. This extra
braking can help you maintain a safe
speed and prevent your brakes from
overheating while going down a
steep hill. Before downshifting,
make sure the engine speed will not
go into the tachometer’s red zone in
the lower gear.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
The manual transmission is
synchronized in all forward gears for
smooth operation. It has a lockout so
you cannot shift directly from fifth to
reverse. When shifting up or down,
make sure you push the clutch pedal
down all the way, shift to the next
gear, and let the pedal up gradually.
When you are not shifting, do not
rest your foot on the clutch pedal.
This can cause the clutch to wear out
faster.
Rapid slowing or speeding up
can cause loss of control on
slippery surfaces. If you crash,
you can be injured.
155
07/06/28 20:36:38 31SAA610 0161 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Manual Transmission
Recommended Shift Points
Drive in the highest gear that lets
the engine run and accelerate
smoothly. This will give you good
fuel economy and effective
emissions control. The following
shift points are recommended:
Shift up
Normal acceleration
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
15 mph (24 km/h)
27 mph (43 km/h)
39 mph (62 km/h)
53 mph (85 km/h)
156
Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
The engine speed limiter only works
when you upshift; engine speed is
not limited during downshifts.
Before downshifting, make sure the
engine will not go into the
tachometer’s red zone.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:36:46 31SAA610 0162 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators
Shifting
SHIFT LEVER
These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
All models except Sport
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
RELEASE BUTTON
Sport model is shown
To shift from Park to any position,
press firmly on the brake pedal and
press the release button on the front
of the shift lever, then pull the lever.
You cannot shift out of Park when
the ignition switch is in the LOCK
(0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
157
Driving
Sport model
07/06/28 20:36:52 31SAA610 0163 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Automatic Transmission
All models except Sport
To shift from:
P to R
R to P
N to R
D3 to 2
2 to 1
1 to 2
2 to D3
D3 to D
D to N
D to D3
N to D
R to N
158
Do this:
Press the brake pedal, and
press the shift lever release
button.
Press the shift lever release
button.
Sport model
To shift from:
P to R
R to P
N to R
D to S
S to D
D to N
N to D
R to N
Do this:
Press the brake pedal, and
press the shift lever release
button.
Press the shift lever release
button.
Park (P) − This position mechanically locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
button on the front of the shift lever
to move it.
Move the shift lever.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on
page 161 .
Move the shift lever.
To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. You must also press the
release button to shift into Park. The
shift lever must be in Park before
you can remove the key from the
ignition switch.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:37:01 31SAA610 0164 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Reverse (R) − Press the brake
pedal and press the release button
on the front of the shift lever to shift
from Park to reverse. To shift from
reverse to neutral, come to a
complete stop, and then shift. Press
the release button before shifting
into reverse from neutral.
All models except Sport
Second (2) − To shift to second,
press the release button on the front
of the shift lever. This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop.
Use second gear:
For more power when climbing.
All models except Sport
Drive (D3) −This position is similar
to D, except only the first three
gears are selected. Use D3 to provide
engine braking when going down a
steep hill. D3 can also keep the
transmission from cycling between
third and fourth gears in stop-and-go
driving.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
To help reduce wheel spin.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
159
Driving
Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.
Drive (D) − Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
speed and acceleration. You may
notice the transmission shifting up at
higher engine speeds when the
engine is cold. This helps the engine
warm up faster.
07/06/28 20:37:06 31SAA610 0165 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Automatic Transmission
All models except Sport
On Sport model
First (1) − To shift from second to
first, press the release button on the
front of the shift lever. This position
locks the transmission in first gear.
By upshifting and downshifting
through 1, 2, D3, and D, you can
operate the transmission much like a
manual transmission without a
clutch pedal.
S position (S) − To shift into the S
position, press the release button on
the front of the shift lever, and move
the lever to S. This position is similar
to D, except only gears from first to
fourth are selected. The S position
keeps the transmission from cycling
between fourth and fifth gears in
stop-and-go driving.
With the shift lever in D or S, you
can also use the paddle shifters to
shift the transmission up or down.
With the paddle shifters, you can
operate the transmission much like a
manual transmission without a
clutch pedal. For more information
on driving with the paddle shifters,
see page 162 .
160
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
07/06/28 20:37:15 31SAA610 0166 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Release
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
COVER
RELEASE
BUTTON
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
4. Insert the key in the shift lock
release slot.
5. Push down on the key while you
press the release button on the
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to neutral.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6. Remove the key from the shift
lock release slot, then reinstall the
cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the left side. Press the
brake pedal, and restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.
161
Driving
3. Put a cloth on the notch of the
shift lock release slot cover. Using
a small flat-tipped screwdriver or a
metal fingernail file, carefully pry
on the notch of the cover to
remove it.
NOTCH
07/06/28 20:37:22 31SAA610 0167 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Sport only)
Using the Paddle Shifters in D
position (D-Paddle Shift Mode)
When you are driving in D position,
you can shift the transmission up or
down manually with the paddle
shifters.
GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
162
To shift up or down, use the +
(right) or − (left) paddle shifter on
each side of the steering wheel.
When you pull either paddle shifter,
the gear position indicator shows you
the selected gear number.
Each time you pull the + (right), the
transmission shifts to a higher gear.
Pull the − (left) to downshift. You
will see the selected gear number on
the instrument panel.
When the transmission returns to
drive mode (D), the displayed gear
number goes out.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:37:29 31SAA610 0168 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Sport only)
Downshifting with the paddle shifter
allows you to increase the engine
braking when going down steep or
long hills, and provides more power
when climbing uphills. You can
upshift the transmission manually to
reduce the rpm. Driving in the
higher gear helps fuel economy.
Each time you pull either paddle
shifter, the transmission shifts one
gear up or down. If you want to shift
up or down more than two gears, pull
the paddle shifter twice, pause, and
then pull it again.
You cannot downshift with the
paddle shifter before the engine
speed reaches the upper limit of the
lower gear. If you try to do this, the
gear position indicator will flash the
number of the lower gear several
times, then return to a higher gear
position.
The transmission downshifts to first
gear and returns to drive mode (D)
when the vehicle comes to a
complete stop and the vehicle speed
is about 6 mph (10 km/h).
If there is a problem in the
transmission while you are driving
with the paddle shifters, the D
indicator flashes, the D-paddle shift
mode is canceled, and the
transmission returns to drive mode
(D).
Also, you cannot upshift with the
paddle shifter before the engine
speed reaches the lower limit of the
higher gear.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
163
Driving
The transmission control system
monitors the accelerator pedal use
and your driving conditions. When
you press the accelerator pedal as in
normal driving, the system judges
that you are driving at a constant
cruising speed without using the
paddle shifters. Under these
conditions, D-paddle shift mode is
canceled, and the transmission
automatically returns to drive mode
(D).
The transmission remains in the
selected gear if you do not accelerate.
07/06/28 20:37:38 31SAA610 0169 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Sport only)
Using the Paddle Shift in S
position (Sequential Shift Mode)
With the shift lever in S position, you
can select the sequential shift mode
to shift gears; much like a manual
transmission using the paddle
shifters, but without a clutch pedal.
To enter the sequential shift mode,
press the release button on the front
of the shift lever, move the lever to
the S position, then pull either paddle
shifter. To return to drive mode (D),
move the shift lever to the D position.
While you are driving in the
sequential shift mode, the
transmission will not automatically
return to drive mode (D).
GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
‘‘M’’ INDICATOR
When you move the shift lever from
‘‘D’’ to ‘‘S’’ position and pull either
paddle shifter, the gear position
indicator displays on ‘‘M’’ along with
the selected gear number.
To upshift, pull the + (right) paddle
shifter. To downshift, pull the −
(left) paddle shifter.
When you accelerate from a stop,
the transmission starts in first gear,
and you must manually upshift
between first and fifth gears. Make
sure you upshift before the engine
speed reaches the tachometer’s red
zone.
The transmission remains in the
selected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). There
is no automatic downshift when you
push the accelerator pedal to the
floor.
When you are driving in 4th or 5th
gear, the transmission downshifts to
the lower gear under the following
conditions:
The vehicle slows down to a
certain speed.
You press the brake pedal.
164
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:37:46 31SAA610 0170 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Sport only)
Downshifting gives you more power
when climbing, and provides engine
braking when going down a steep hill.
The transmission also shifts
automatically as the vehicle comes to
a complete stop. It downshifts to first
gear when the vehicle speed reaches
6 mph (10 km/h) or less.
If the vehicle speed decreases below
the redline of the selected lower gear
while the indicator is flashing, the
transmission downshifts, and the
indicator displays the selected gear.
To shift
from
Speed range
1→2
over 0 mph (0 km/h)
2→3
over 6 mph (10 km/h)
3→4
over 21 mph (34 km/h)
4→5
over 30 mph (48 km/h)
To shift
from
Speed range
2→1
under 25 mph (40 km/h)
3→2
under 47 mph (75 km/h)
4→3
under 75 mph (121 km/h)
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting in Second Gear
When you are in sequential shift
mode, and the vehicle is stopped,
pull the + (right) paddle shifter to
shift to second gear. You will see ‘‘M
2’’ in the display. Starting in second
gear helps to reduce wheelspin in
deep snow or on a slippery surface.
Driving
You cannot downshift with the
paddle shifter before the engine
speed reaches the upper limit of the
lower gear. If you try to do this, the
gear indicator will flash the number
of the lower gear several times, then
the indicator will display the higher
gear number.
Here are the speed ranges for
upshifting and downshifting.
165
07/06/28 20:37:55 31SAA610 0171 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Parking
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, set the parking brake
before you put the transmission in
Park. This keeps the vehicle from
moving and putting pressure on the
parking mechanism in the
transmission.
Parking Tips
Make sure the windows are closed.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.
in the cargo area or take them
with you.
Lock the doors and the tailgate.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb. If you have a manual
transmission, put it in reverse gear
and set the parking brake.
On Sport model
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
166
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb. If you have a manual
transmission, put it in first gear
and set the parking brake.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
07/06/28 20:38:02 31SAA610 0172 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with front
disc brakes. The brakes on the rear
wheels are drum. A power assist
helps reduce the effort needed on
the brake pedal. The anti-lock brake
system (ABS) helps you retain
steering control when braking very
hard.
Braking System Design
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Brake Pad Wear Indicators
If the front brake pads need
replacing, you will hear a distinctive,
metallic screeching sound when you
apply the brake pedal. If you do not
have the brake pads replaced, they
will screech all the time. It is normal
for the brakes to occasionally squeal
or squeak when you apply them.
Driving
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, and reduces their effectiveness
and reduces brake pad life. In
addition, fuel economy can be
reduced. It also keeps your brake
lights on all the time, confusing
drivers behind you.
Check your brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious and alert in your driving.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effectiveness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
167
07/06/28 20:38:09 31SAA610 0173 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helps prevent the wheels from
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
The electronic brake distribution
(EBD) system, which is part of the
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
braking distribution according to
vehicle loading.
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
the brake pedal very hard before the
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
If this indicator comes on, the antilock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If the ABS indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as shown on
page 232 .
You should never pump the brake pedal.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
168
ABS Indicator
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:38:15 31SAA610 0174 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Important Safety Reminders
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle. It only helps with the
steering control during braking.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page 232 . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without antilock.
Driving
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the EBD system may also
be shut down.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
169
07/06/28 20:38:23 31SAA610 0175 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
U.S. models only
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor (not including the spare tire).
If the air pressure of a tire becomes
significantly low, the sensor in that
tire immediately sends a signal that
causes the low tire pressure
indicator to come on.
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
When the low tire pressure indicator
is on, one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. You
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure as indicated on
the vehicle’s tire information placard.
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to
the recommended pressure shown
on the driver’s doorjamb.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 218 ).
170
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If you cannot make the low tire
pressure indicator go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Because tire pressure varies by
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure indicator may
come on unexpectedly.
07/06/28 20:38:30 31SAA610 0176 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Refer to page 209 for tire inflation
guidelines.
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when cold, and
set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified on the tire
information label and in the owner’s
manual (see page 210 ).
When you restart the vehicle with
the compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator may also come on and stay
on after driving several miles
(kilometers).
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
This indicator comes on and stays on
if there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system.
Driving
For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure
indicator to come on. Or, if you
check and adjust your tire pressure
in cooler conditions, and drive into
extremely hot conditions, the tire
may become overinflated. However,
the low tire pressure indicator will
not come on if the tires are
overinflated.
If this happens, the system will shut
off and no longer monitor tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
the tire pressures monthly.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
171
07/06/28 20:38:38 31SAA610 0177 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Changing a Tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure indicator will come on.
Replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 218 ).
Each wheel (except the compact
spare tire wheel) is equipped with a
tire pressure sensor mounted inside
the tire behind the valve stem. You
must use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
qualified technician.
The low tire pressure indicator or
the TPMS indicator will go off, after
several miles (kilometers) driving,
when you replace the spare tire with
the specified regular tire equipped
with the tire pressure monitor sensor.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Have the flat tire repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible.
After you replace the flat tire with
the compact spare tire, the low tire
pressure indicator stays on. This is
normal; the system is not monitoring
the spare tire pressure. Manually
check the spare tire pressure to be
sure it is correct. After several miles
(kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low tire
pressure indicator goes off.
172
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:38:47 31SAA610 0178 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a
trailer. Attempting to do so can void
your warranties.
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a
Motorhome
Your vehicle can be towed behind a
motorhome at legal highway speeds
up to 65 mph (100 km/h). Do not
exceed 65 mph (100 km/h).
Otherwise, severe transmission
damage will occur.
1. Check the transmission fluid level
(see page 193 ). Do not overfill.
2. Start the engine.
3. Press on the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever through all its
positions.
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
towing.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
173
Driving
When purchasing a tow bar, make
sure you select a reputable
manufacturer and installer. Follow
the manufacturer’s attachment
instructions carefully.
Automatic transmission:
Perform the following procedure
every day immediately before you
begin towing. Otherwise severe
automatic transmission damage will
occur.
07/06/28 20:38:53 31SAA610 0179 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
4. Shift to D position and hold for 5
seconds, then to N. Let the engine
run for 3 minutes, then turn it off.
5. Release the parking brake.
Extended Towing
6. Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
If you tow more than 8 hours in one
day, you should repeat the above
procedure at least every 8 hours
(when you stop for fuel, etc.)
Severe transmission damage will occur
if the vehicle is shif ted f rom reverse to
neutral and then towed with the drive
wheels on the ground.
7. Make sure the radio is off, and
remove any item plugged into the
accessory power socket so you do
not run down the battery.
174
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Failure to f ollow the recommended
instructions exactly will result in severe
automatic transmission damage. If you
cannot shif t the transmission or start
the engine, your vehicle must be
transported on a f lat-bed truck or
trailer.
07/06/28 20:39:00 31SAA610 0180 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
If you tow your vehicle with an
automatic transmission, the Honda
Genuine ATF-Z1 transmission fluid
must be changed every 2 years or
30,000 miles (48,000 km), whichever
comes first.
Manual transmission:
1. Move the shifter into the Neutral
position.
2. Release the parking brake.
3. Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
4. Make sure the radio is off, and
remove any item plugged into the
accessory power socket so you do
not run down the battery.
175
07/06/28 20:39:02 31SAA610 0181 Main Menu
176
Table Of Contents
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:39:07 31SAA610 0182 Main Menu
Maintenance
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
maintenance minder messages on
the information display, and
instructions for simple maintenance
tasks you may want to take care of
yourself.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
177
Maintenance
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page 261 for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
Maintenance Safety ....................... 178
Maintenance Minder ..................... 179
Fluid Locations............................... 186
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 187
Changing the Engine Oil
and Filter..................................... 188
Engine Coolant ............................... 190
Windshield Washers ..................... 192
Transmission Fluid ........................ 193
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ........................................ 193
Manual Transmission Fluid ..... 194
Brake and Clutch Fluid ................. 195
Lights .............................................. 196
Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 203
Floor Mats ...................................... 203
Audio Antenna ............................... 204
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 205
Wiper Blades .................................. 205
Wheels ............................................ 208
Tires ................................................ 208
Checking the Battery .................... 214
Vehicle Storage .............................. 216
07/06/28 20:39:17 31SAA610 0183 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Important Safety Precautions
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
178
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust. Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Burns from hot parts. Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Injury from moving parts. Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
07/06/28 20:39:25 31SAA610 0184 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Maintenance Minder
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items on
the information display to show you
when you should have your dealer do
engine oil replacement and indicated
maintenance service.
Based on the engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.
Engine Oil Life Display
SELECT/RESET KNOB
ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR
Calculated Engine
Oil Life (%)
100 %−91 %
90 %−81 %
80 %−71 %
70 %−61 %
60 %−51 %
50 %−41 %
40 %−31 %
30 %−21 %
20 %−16 %
15 %−11 %
10 %−6 %
5 %−1 %
0%
Displayed
Engine Oil Life (%)
100 %
90 %
80 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
40 %
30 %
20 %
15 %
10 %
5%
0%
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
179
Maintenance
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, then press and release
the select/reset knob repeatedly
until the engine oil life indicator
appears (see page 69 ).
The remaining engine oil life is
shown on the display according to
this table:
07/06/28 20:39:30 31SAA610 0185 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Maintenance Minder
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE
ITEM CODE(S)
ENGINE OIL LIFE
INDICATOR
If the remaining engine oil life is 15
to 6 percent, you will see the engine
oil life indicator every time you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The maintenance minder
indicator will also come on, and the
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
below the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ message.
180
The 15 and 10 percent oil life
indicator reminds you that the time
is coming soon to take your vehicle
in for the required maintenance.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When the remaining engine oil life is
5 to 1 percent, you will see a
‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the
same maintenance item code(s),
every time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
07/06/28 20:39:40 31SAA610 0186 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Maintenance Minder
The maintenance item code or codes
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page 182 ).
NEGATIVE MILEAGE
You can switch the information
display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer or the trip
meter. Press and release the select/
reset knob on the instrument panel.
When you see this message, have
the indicated maintenance
performed by your dealer as soon as
possible.
When the remaining engine oil life is
0 percent, the engine oil life indicator
will blink. The display comes on
every time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. The
maintenance minder indicator
(
) also comes on and remains
on in the instrument panel. When
you see this message, immediately
have the indicated maintenance done
by your dealer.
If you do not perform the indicated
maintenance, negative mileage is
displayed and begins to blink after
the vehicle has been driven 10 miles
(10 km) or more.
Negative mileage means your
vehicle has passed the maintenance
required point.
Immediately have the indicated
maintenance done by your dealer.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
181
Maintenance
When the engine oil life is 15 to 1
percent, the maintenance minder
indicator (
) comes on every
time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, then it goes out
if you switch the information display.
07/06/28 20:39:49 31SAA610 0187 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Maintenance Minder
To change the information display
from the engine oil life display to the
odometer or the trip meter, press
and release the select/reset knob.
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM
When the engine oil life is 0 percent
or negative mileage, the
maintenance minder indicator
(
) remains on even if you
change the information display.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on the
following.
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S)
All maintenance items displayed on
the information display are in code.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page 185 .
182
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Press the select/reset knob
repeatedly until the engine oil life
is displayed.
07/06/28 20:39:56 31SAA610 0188 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance
Precautions
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
proper maintenance intervals. This
can lead to serious mechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
4. Press the select/reset knob for
another 5 seconds. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
183
Maintenance
3. Press the select/reset knob for
about 10 seconds. The engine oil
life and the maintenance item
code(s) will blink.
07/06/28 20:40:06 31SAA610 0189 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Maintenance Minder
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out your
Honda Service History or Canadian
Maintenance Log. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.
We recommend using Honda parts
and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
184
U.S. Vehicles: Maintenance,
replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and
systems may be done by any
automotive repair establishment
or individual using parts that are
‘‘certified’’ to EPA standards.
Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page 139 .
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the
information display.
Automatic transmission − Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
193 .
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
You should check the following
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Engine coolant level − Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page 140 .
Brakes − Check the fluid level
monthly. See page 195 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
210 .
Lights − Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page 196 .
07/06/28 20:40:14 31SAA610 0190 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Maintenance Minder
Symbol
A
B
Symbol
1
2
3
* 1 : If the message, ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the
display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page 184 .
NOTE:
Independent of maintenance message in the information display, replace
the brake fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.
4
5
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
This requires transmission fluid changes more
frequently than recommended by the Maintenance
Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under
these conditions, have the transmission fluid
changed at 60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every
30,000 miles (48,000 km). (For A/T only)
If you tow a FIT behind a motorhome, the
transmission fluid must be changed every 2 years or
30,000 miles (48,000 km), whichever comes first.
(For A/T only)
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
185
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
07/06/28 20:40:18 31SAA610 0191 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Fluid Locations
BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
ENGINE OIL
FILL CAP
ENGINE OIL
DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
CLUTCH FLUID
(Manual
Transmission only)
(Gray cap)
RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK (Yellow loop)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
186
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:40:26 31SAA610 0192 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Adding Engine Oil
Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for yearround protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.
Ambient Temperature
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
187
Maintenance
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on the valve cover. Pour in
the oil slowly and carefully so you do
not spill any. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment. Reinstall the engine
oil fill cap, and tighten it securely.
Wait a few minutes, and recheck the
oil level on the engine oil dipstick.
Do not fill above the upper mark; you
could damage the engine.
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API Certification Seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
07/06/28 20:40:34 31SAA610 0193 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Synthetic Oil
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil, it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals given in the maintenance
schedule.
Changing the Engine Oil and
Filter
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the information
display. The oil and filter collect
contaminants that can damage your
engine if they are not removed
regularly.
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service stationtype hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
188
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WASHER
OIL DRAIN BOLT
1. Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
2. Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
07/06/28 20:40:44 31SAA610 0194 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER
5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
6. Refill the engine with the recommended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
3.8 US qt (3.6 )
Make sure the oil filter gasket is
not stuck to the engine block. If it
is, remove it before installing a
new oil filter.
4. Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
7. Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
Maintenance
3. Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
8. Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
9. Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
the oil level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add more oil.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
189
07/06/28 20:40:50 31SAA610 0195 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant
RESERVE TANK
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
190
Always use Honda Long-life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
07/06/28 20:40:58 31SAA610 0196 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Engine Coolant
RESERVE TANK
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
RADIATOR CAP
2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without
pressing down.
3. Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
Maintenance
1. Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
4. The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pour the coolant slowly and
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
191
07/06/28 20:41:04 31SAA610 0197 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Windshield Washers
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
LEVEL GAUGE
On Canadian models: The low washer
level indicator comes on when the
level is low (see page 65 ).
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
Check the fluid level by removing
the cap and looking at the level
gauge.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.
192
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:41:14 31SAA610 0198 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Transmission Fluid
4. Remove the dipstick, and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
DIPSTICK
HOT
MARK
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds (but
no longer than 90 seconds) before
doing step 2.
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
5. If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
hole to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
marks.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid).
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
193
Maintenance
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
UPPER
MARK
LOWER
MARK
07/06/28 20:41:23 31SAA610 0199 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid
Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Do
not mix with other transmission f luids.
Using transmission f luid other than
Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 may cause
deterioration in transmission operation
and durability, and could result in
damage to the transmission.
Damage resulting f rom the use of
transmission f luid other than Honda
Genuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by the
Honda new vehicle warranty.
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
194
FILLER BOLT
Correct level
WASHER
Check the fluid level with the
transmission at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle on level
ground. Remove the transmission
filler bolt, and carefully feel inside
the bolt hole with your finger. The
fluid level should be up to the edge
of the bolt hole. If it is not, add
Honda Manual Transmission Fluid
(MTF) until it starts to run out of the
hole.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Put a new washer on the filler bolt,
then reinstall the filler bolt and
tighten it securely.
If Honda MTF is not available, you
may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
viscosity motor oil with the API
Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR
GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
temporary replacement. However,
motor oil does not contain the proper
additives, and continued use can
cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
soon as it is convenient.
If you are not sure how to check and
add fluid, contact your dealer.
07/06/28 20:41:33 31SAA610 0200 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check the brake fluid level in the
reservoirs monthly.
Brake Fluid
Clutch Fluid
Manual Transmission only
MAX
MAX
Replace the brake fluid according to
the time recommendation in the
maintenance minder schedule.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads/shoes.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
MIN
The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If it is not, add
brake fluid to bring it up to that level.
Use the same fluid specified for the
brake system.
A low fluid level can indicate a leak
in the clutch system. Have this
system inspected as soon as possible.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
195
Maintenance
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
MIN
07/06/28 20:41:40 31SAA610 0201 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Lights
Headlight Aiming
The headlights were properly aimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
cargo area, readjustment may be
required. Adjustments should be
done by your dealer or other
qualified mechanic.
Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
HOLDING CLIP
1. To change the bulb on the driver’s
side, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
right, then turn off the engine. To
change the bulb on the passenger’s
side, turn the steering wheel to the
left.
2. Use a flat-tip screwdriver to
remove the holding clip from the
inner fender, then pull the inner
fender cover back.
196
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:41:49 31SAA610 0202 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Lights
HOLD-DOWN
WIRE
BULB
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR
5. Unclip the end of the hold-down
wire from its slot. Pivot the wire
out of the way, then remove the
bulb.
HOLD-DOWN
WIRE
6. Install the new bulb into the hole,
making sure the tabs are in their
slots. Pivot the hold-down wire
back in place, and clip the end into
the slot.
RUBBER WEATHER SEAL
INSPECTION WINDOW
7. Make sure that the hold-down
wire is installed properly and
securely. You can check its
installation from the inspection
window on the headlight assembly.
4. Remove the rubber weather seal
by pulling on the tab.
8. Install the rubber seal over the
back of the headlight assembly.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
197
Maintenance
3. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pulling the
connector straight back.
07/06/28 20:41:55 31SAA610 0203 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Lights
9. Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb. Make sure it is
connected securely. Turn on the
headlights to test the new bulb.
10. Reinstall the inner fender cover.
Then reinstall the holding clip, and
lock it in place by pushing on its
center.
Replacing a Parking Light/Front
Side Marker Bulb and a Turn
Signal Light Bulb
1. To change the bulb on the driver’s
side, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
right, then turn off the engine. To
change the bulb on the passenger’s
side, turn the steering wheel to the
left.
HOLDING CLIP
2. Use a flat-tip screwdriver to
remove the holding clip from the
inner fender, then pull the inner
fender cover back.
198
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:42:03 31SAA610 0204 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Lights
Replacing a Fog Light Bulb
On Sport model
The fog lights use halogen bulbs.
When replacing a bulb, handle it
carefully. See page 196 for more
information.
PARKING LIGHT/FRONT SIDE MARKER
BULB
TURN SIGNAL LIGHT BULB
6. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
7. Reinstall the inner fender cover.
Then reinstall the holding clip, and
lock it in place by pushing on its
center.
Maintenance
3. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
5. Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
199
07/06/28 20:42:12 31SAA610 0205 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Lights
5. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
SCREW
6. Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
7. Turn on the fog lights to test the
new bulb.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the screw.
2. To remove the fog light assembly,
slide it inward, then carefully pull
it out of the bumper.
200
3. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by squeezing the
connector to unlock the tab, then
slide the connector off the bulb.
4. Remove the bulb by turning it
about one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8. Reinstall the fog light assembly,
then tighten the screw.
07/06/28 20:42:21 31SAA610 0206 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Lights
4. Remove the burned out bulb from
the socket by pulling it straight out
of its socket.
Replacing Rear Bulbs
5. Install the new bulb in the socket.
6. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
7. Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
LIGHT ASSEMBLY COVER
8. Reinstall the light assembly cover.
2. Determine which of the four bulbs
is burned out: stop/taillight, backup light, turn signal light, or
taillight.
3. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
201
Maintenance
1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
the edge of the light assembly
cover. Remove the cover by
carefully prying in the notch on its
middle edge with a flat-tip
screwdriver.
07/06/28 20:42:29 31SAA610 0207 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Lights
5. Put the socket back into the light
assembly, and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
6. Put the cover back on the light
assembly. Push it in until it locks
in place.
1. Open the tailgate. Remove the
light assembly cover by pushing in
the tabs on both sides and pulling
the cover off.
2. Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
202
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
4. Press the brake pedal to make
sure the new bulb is working.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:42:36 31SAA610 0208 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
Cleaning the Seat Belts
LOOP
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Floor Mats
(Optional)
If your vehicle is equipped with
genuine Honda floor mats, the mats
hook over floor mat anchors. This
keeps the floor mats from sliding
forward and possibly interfering with
the pedals or making the front
passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
203
Maintenance
FRONT
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
07/06/28 20:42:42 31SAA610 0209 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Foor Mats, Audio Antenna
A non-Honda floor mat may not fit
your vehicle properly. This could
prevent the proper operation of the
folding rear seats and the passenger’s
seat weight sensors. We recommend
using genuine Honda floor mats. Do
not put additional floor mats on top
of the anchored mats.
Audio Antenna
REAR
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
to re-anchor it when you put it back
in your vehicle.
204
Your vehicle is equipped with an
antenna at the rear of the roof . Bef ore
using a ‘‘drive-through’’ car wash,
remove the antenna by unscrewing it by
hand. This prevents the antenna f rom
being damaged by the car wash brushes.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:42:50 31SAA610 0210 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades
Dust and Pollen Filter
On models with A/C
This filter removes the dust and
pollen that is brought in from the
outside through the heating and
cooling system.
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
To replace a front wiper blade:
1. Raise each wiper arm off the
windshield, lifting the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and wiper arms.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
205
Maintenance
Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air, or if the flow from
the heating and cooling system
becomes less than usual.
07/06/28 20:42:58 31SAA610 0211 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Wiper Blades
REINFORCEMENT
BLADE
BLADE
TOP
LOCK TAB
2. Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm:
Press and hold the lock tab.
Slide the blade assembly toward
the lock tab until it releases
from the wiper arm.
3. Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
When replacing a wiper blade,
make sure not to drop the wiper
blade or wiper arm down on the
windshield.
206
4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
Make sure the three rubber tabs
inside the blade fit to each notch
of the reinforcement, as shown.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:43:07 31SAA610 0212 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Wiper Blades
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield, the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
1. Raise the wiper arm off the glass.
2. Slide the blade out of the wiper
arm.
3. Examine the new wiper blade. If it
has no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade and install them in the
slots along the edge of the new
CONTINUED
blade.
Make sure the blade is completely
installed.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
207
Maintenance
To replace the rear wiper blade:
5. Place the top of the wiper blade on
the end of the blade assembly, and
slide the blade onto the assembly
in the direction pointed to by the
arrow.
07/06/28 20:43:16 31SAA610 0213 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Wiper Blades, Wheels, Tires
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
4. Slide the new blade into the wiper
arm. Make sure it is engaged in
the slot along its full length.
Wheels
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
the same solution, and rinse them
thoroughly.
Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
If equipped
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps
the aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels
with harsh chemicals (including
some commercial wheel cleaners)
or a stiff brush can damage the
clear-coat. To clean the wheels,
use a mild detergent and a soft
brush or sponge.
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
5. Lower the wiper arm.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
208
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:43:25 31SAA610 0214 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Tires
Inflation Guidelines
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)* warns you when a tire
pressure is low. See page 170 for
more information.
* : If equipped
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
spare tire at the same time.
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot [driven for several miles
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4
to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
You should use your own tire
pressure gauge whenever you check
your tire pressures. This will make it
easier for you to tell if a pressure
loss is due to a tire problem and not
due to a variation between gauges.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
209
Maintenance
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicle ride more harshly, are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with TPMS, we
recommend that you visually check
your tires every day. If you think a
tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
07/06/28 20:43:37 31SAA610 0215 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Tires
Recommended Tire Pressures
The following charts show the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal and high-speed driving
conditions.
The compact spare tire pressure is:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
All models except Sport
Tire Size
P175/65R14 81S
Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Front/Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm )
For additional information about
your tires, see page 248 .
Tire Inspection
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
You should look for:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
you find either of these conditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Sport model
Tire Size
P195/55R15 84H
210
Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Front/Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm )
Excessive tread wear.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:43:46 31SAA610 0216 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Tires
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire Maintenance
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
On vehicles with aluminum wheels,
improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only Honda wheel weights f or
balancing.
211
Maintenance
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a
band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire.
Tire Service Life
The service life of your tires is
dependent on many factors,
including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even
when the tires are not in use).
In addition to your regular
inspections and inflation pressure
maintenance, it is recommended that
you have annual inspections
performed once the tires reach five
years old. It is also recommended
that all tires, including the spare, be
removed from service after 10 years
from the date of manufacture,
regardless of their condition or state
of wear.
The last four digits of the TIN (tire
identification number) are found on
the sidewall of the tire and indicate
the date of manufacture (See Tire
Labeling on page 248 ).
07/06/28 20:43:55 31SAA610 0217 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Tires
Tire Rotation
Front
Front
(For Non-directional (For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Tires and Wheels)
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the information display. Move the
tires to the positions shown in the
chart each time they are rotated. If
you purchase directional tires, rotate
only front-to-back.
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
It is best to replace all four tires at
the same time. If that is not possible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS to work inconsistently.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. When replacing
tires, use the same size originally
supplied with the vehicle. Tire size
and construction can affect wheel
speed and may cause the system to
activate.
When the tires are rotated, make
sure the air pressures are checked.
212
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels (if equipped). If you
do not, the tire pressure monitoring
system will not work.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
07/06/28 20:44:06 31SAA610 0218 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Tires
Wheel and Tire Specifications
Wheels:
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
All models except Sport
14 x 5 1/2JJ
Sport model
15 x 6 JJ
Tires:
All models except Sport
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
P175/65R14 81S
Sport model
P195/55R15 84H
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
Snow Tires
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as original tires. Mount snow tires on
all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may be lower than your original tires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
213
Maintenance
See page 246 for DOT tire quality
grading information, and page
248 for tire size and labeling
information.
Winter Driving
Tires marked ‘‘M + S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an allweather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
07/06/28 20:44:13 31SAA610 0219 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Tires, Checking the Battery
Tire Chains
Mount tire chains on your tires when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Install them only on the
front tires.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’
cable-type traction devices, with
rubber chain tensioners, on the front
tires. Use traction devices only when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Make sure they are the
correct size for your tires. Metal linktype ‘‘chains’’ should not be used.
214
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can.
Make sure they are not contacting
the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Checking the Battery
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
Check the condition of the battery
monthly by looking at the test
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors. The test indicator window’s
location differs according to the
battery manufacturer.
07/06/28 20:44:19 31SAA610 0220 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Checking the Battery
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative (−) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the time
setting is lost. To reset the time, see
page 129 .
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the
audio system may disable itself. The
next time you turn on the radio, you
will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
bars to enter the code (see page
128 ).
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
215
Maintenance
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
07/06/28 20:44:28 31SAA610 0221 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Fill the fuel tank.
Disconnect the battery.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Support the front and rear wiper
blade arms with a folded towel or
rag so they do not touch the
windshield.
Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in reverse
(manual) or Park (automatic).
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
Block the rear wheels.
216
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
07/06/28 20:44:32 31SAA610 0222 Main Menu
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
Compact Spare Tire....................... 218
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 219
If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 224
Jump Starting ................................. 226
If the Engine Overheats ............... 228
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 230
Charging System Indicator........... 230
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 231
Brake System Indicator ................ 232
Fuses ............................................... 233
Fuse Locations ............................... 236
Emergency Towing ....................... 238
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck ........... 239
Taking Care of the Unexpected
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
217
07/06/28 20:44:40 31SAA610 0223 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Follow these precautions:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.
Do not mount tire chains on the
compact spare tire.
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
the same make and model.
On vehicles with the TPMS
system, the low tire pressure
indicator comes on and stays on
after you replace the flat tire with
the compact spare tire. After
several miles (kilometers) driving
with the compact spare tire, the
TPMS indicator comes on and the
low tire pressure indicator goes off.
218
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
07/06/28 20:44:48 31SAA610 0224 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area to stop
that is far away from the traffic lanes.
STRAP
LOOP
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
SPARE
TIRE
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
TOOL KIT
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
3. Open the tailgate. Raise the cargo
area floor lid by lifting it up with
the strap that has a loop. To keep
the floor lid open, hook the loop of
the strap to a leg of the rear center
head restraint.
4. Take the tool kit out of the spare
tire.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
219
Taking Care of the Unexpected
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park (automatic)
or reverse (manual). Apply the
parking brake.
JACK
07/06/28 20:44:56 31SAA610 0225 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
EXTENSION
WHEEL NUT
WHEEL COVER
5. Take the jack out of the cargo
area.
Turn the jack’s end bracket
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack by lifting it straight
up.
7. On all models except Sport,
remove the wheel cover by
carefully prying under its edge
with the flat tip of the extension.
6. Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well.
220
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
8. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.
07/06/28 20:45:03 31SAA610 0226 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
EXTENSION
JACKING POINT
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
10.Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
11.Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
12.Before mounting the spare tire,
wipe any dirt off the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully; it may be hot from
driving.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
221
Taking Care of the Unexpected
9. Place the jack under the jacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change. It is pointed to by a △
mark molded into the underside of
the body (Sport model). Turn the
end bracket clockwise until the top
of the jack contacts the jacking
point. Make sure the jacking point
tab is resting in the jack notch.
BRAKE HUB
07/06/28 20:45:10 31SAA610 0227 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
13.Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
For
For
normal spare
tire
tire
14.Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
15.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
16.On Sport model:
Remove the center cap before
storing the flat tire.
222
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
17.Place the flat tire face down in the
spare tire well.
18.Secure the flat tire by screwing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
07/06/28 20:45:19 31SAA610 0228 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
19.Store the jack. Place the tool kit in
the center of the flat tire.
Installing a wheel cover
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
CLIPS
21.Remove the strap loop from the
leg of the head restraint, then
lower the floor lid, and close the
tailgate.
CLIPS
All models except Sport
1. Make sure the wire support ring is
hooked into the clips around the
edge of the wheel cover.
2. Align the valve mark on the wheel
cover to the tire valve on the
wheel, then install the wheel cover.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
223
Taking Care of the Unexpected
20.Store the wheel cover or center
cap in the cargo area. Make sure it
will not get scratched or damaged.
07/06/28 20:45:27 31SAA610 0229 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won’t Start
If the Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
WIRE SUPPORT RING
3. Make sure the wire support ring is
on the outer side of the tire valve
as shown.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
If you have a manual transmission,
the clutch pedal must be pushed
all the way to the floor or the
starter will not operate. With an
automatic transmission, it must be
in Park or neutral.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 226 .
224
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:45:36 31SAA610 0230 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
If the Engine Won’t Start
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
are OK, there is probably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
Emergency Towing on page 238 .
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page 77 ).
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page 233 ).
If you find nothing wrong, you will
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See Emergency
Towing on page 238 .
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to Starting the
Engine on page 154 .
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of the
battery and terminal connections
(see page 214 ). You can then try
jump starting the vehicle from a
booster battery (see page 226 ).
The Starter Operates Normally
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
225
07/06/28 20:45:43 31SAA610 0231 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
You cannot start your vehicle with an
automatic transmission by pushing
or pulling it.
226
To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
1. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
2. Turn off all the electrical
accessories: heater, A/C (if
equipped), audio system, lights,
etc. Put the transmission in neutral
(manual) or Park (automatic), and
set the parking brake.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
BOOSTER BATTERY
The numbers in the illustration show
you the order to connect the jumper
cables.
07/06/28 20:45:50 31SAA610 0232 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Jump Starting
5. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
6. Start your vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
4. Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative (−) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the stay as shown. Do
not connect this jumper cable to
any other part of the engine.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
227
Taking Care of the Unexpected
3. Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on your
battery. Connect the other end to
the positive (+) terminal on the
booster battery.
7. Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
07/06/28 20:45:56 31SAA610 0233 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
If the Engine Overheats
The high temperature indicator
should be off under most conditions.
If the engine coolant temperature
gets higher than normal, the
indicator will blink. If it stays on, you
should determine the reason (hot
day, driving up a steep hill, etc.).
If the vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the high
temperature indicator blinking or
remaining on. Or you may see steam
or spray coming from under the
hood.
Driving with the high temperature
indicator on can cause serious damage
to your engine.
228
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in neutral
(manual) or Park (automatic), and
set the parking brake. Turn off all
accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning indicators.
2. If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running, and
check the high temperature
indicator. If the high heat is due to
overloading, the engine should
start to cool down almost
immediately. If it does, wait until
the high temperature indicator
goes off, then continue driving.
4. If the high temperature indicator
stays on, turn off the engine.
07/06/28 20:46:04 31SAA610 0234 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
If the Engine Overheats
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see Emergency
Towing on page 238 ).
6. If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
8. Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
10.Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and check
the high temperature indicator. If
it begins to blink or comes on
again, the engine needs repair
(see Emergency Towing on page
238 ).
11.If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
229
Taking Care of the Unexpected
7. If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the high
temperature indicator goes off
before checking the radiator.
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
9. Start the engine, and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum heat. Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
07/06/28 20:46:14 31SAA610 0235 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
This indicator should never
come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing or stays
on, the oil pressure has dropped very
low or lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
1. Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning lights.
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get
the vehicle stopped.
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page 187 ).
230
2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page 139 ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
4. Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
238 ).
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Charging System Indicator
If the charging system
indicator comes on brightly
when the engine is running, the
battery is not being charged.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
07/06/28 20:46:21 31SAA610 0236 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If this indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the malfunction
indicator lamp may also come on
with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If the battery in your vehicle has
been disconnected or gone dead,
these codes are erased. It takes at
least three days of driving under
various conditions to set the codes
again.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for an emissions
test until the readiness codes are set.
Refer to Emissions Testing for
more information (see page 254 ).
231
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message on
the information display. Tighten the
cap until it clicks at least once.
Tightening the cap will not turn the
indicator off immediately; it can take
several days of normal driving.
If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may go off as you
continue driving, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
07/06/28 20:46:29 31SAA610 0237 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Brake System Indicator
Brake System
Indicator (Red)
The brake system indicator (red)
normally comes on when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and as a reminder to check
the parking brake. It will stay on if
you do not fully release the parking
brake.
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
If the brake system indicator (red)
comes on while driving, the brake
fluid level is probably low. Press
lightly on the brake pedal to see if it
feels normal. If it does, check the
brake fluid level the next time you
stop at a service station (see page
195 ).
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired as
soon as possible (see Emergency
Towing on page 238 ).
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads/shoes.
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
U.S.
232
Canada
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
If the ABS indicator comes on with
the brake system indicator, have
your vehicle inspected by your
dealer immediately.
07/06/28 20:46:36 31SAA610 0238 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Fuses
INTERIOR
UNDER-HOOD
UNDER-HOOD
(On Battery)
TAB
DIAL
DRIVER’S COIN TRAY
The vehicle’s fuses are contained in
three fuse boxes.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
The secondary fuse box is on the
positive terminal of the battery.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
The interior fuse box is behind the
driver’s coin tray. To access it,
remove the tray by turning the dial
counterclockwise then pulling it
toward you. To install the coin tray,
line up the tabs on the bottom, pivot
the tray up to engage its side clips,
then turn the dial clockwise.
The primary under-hood fuse box is
in the engine compartment on the
driver’s side. To open it, push the
tabs as shown.
233
07/06/28 20:46:44 31SAA610 0239 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, check for a
blown fuse first. Determine from the
chart on pages 236 and 237 , or the
diagram on the fuse box lid, which
fuse or fuses control that device.
Check those fuses first, but check all
the fuses before deciding that a
blown fuse is the cause. Replace any
blown fuses, and check if the device
works.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.
2. Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
234
FUSE
BLOWN
3. Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse boxes by
looking through the top at the wire
inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
FUSE PULLER
4. Check the smaller fuses in the
primary under-hood fuse box and
all the fuses in the interior fuse
box by pulling out each one with
the fuse puller provided in the
interior fuse box.
07/06/28 20:46:51 31SAA610 0240 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Fuses
BLOWN
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
6. If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem in your vehicle.
Leave the blown fuse in that
circuit and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
next time you turn on the radio you
will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the five-digit code
(see page 128 ).
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
235
Taking Care of the Unexpected
5. Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with
one of the spare fuses of the same
rating or lower.
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sure you can do without that circuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
07/06/28 20:46:57 31SAA610 0241 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
No. Amps.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
No. Amps.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 A
−
10 A
10 A
−
30 A
10 A
(7.5 A)
20 A
Circuits Protected
Back Up Light
Not Used
METER
Turn Light
Not Used
Front Wipers
SRS
Daytime Running Light*2
Rear Defogger
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
7.5 A
15 A
10 A
10 A
15 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
(7.5 A)
(10 A)
−
−
(20 A)
10 A
10 A
−
7.5 A
7.5 A
15 A
(20 A)
20 A
−
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
*1 : If equipped
236
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Circuits Protected
HAC
Fuel Pump
Rear Wiper
SRS
IGP
Left Rear Power Window
Right Rear Power Window
Right Front Power Window
TPMS*1
Daytime Running Light*2
Not Used
Not Used
Fog Light*1
Small Light
LAF
Not Used
ABS
Radio
ACC Socket
Power Door Lock*1
Driver’s Power Window
Not Used
LAF
DBW
Ignition Coil
*2 : Canadian models
07/06/28 20:47:05 31SAA610 0242 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Fuse Locations
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOXES
PRIMARY
Primary Fuse Box
No. Amps.
Circuits Protected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
80 A
60 A
50 A
30 A
40 A
40 A
(30 A)
10 A
Battery
EPS
Ignition
ABS
Blower Relay
Power Window
(HAC Option)
Back Up
No. Amps.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
30 A
30 A
30 A
20 A
20 A
10 A
30 A
15 A
Circuits Protected
Small Light
Cooling Fan
Condenser Fan, MG Clutch*
Right Headlight
Left Headlight
Hazard
ABS F/S
Horn, Stop
* : If equipped
Secondary Fuse Box (On the battery)
Amps.
Circuits Protected
80 A
Battery
Taking Care of the Unexpected
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
237
07/06/28 20:47:16 31SAA610 0243 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
There are two ways to tow your
vehicle:
Flat-bed Equipment − The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck. This is the best way to
transport your vehicle.
Wheel-lift Equipment − The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the tires (front) and lift them
off the ground. The other two tires
remain on the ground. This is an
acceptable way to tow your
vehicle.
238
If, due to damage, your vehicle must
be towed with the front wheels on
the ground, do this:
Manual transmission:
Release the parking brake.
Shift the transmission to neutral.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Automatic transmission:
Release the parking brake.
Start the engine.
Shift to D position and hold for 5
seconds, then to N. Let the engine
run for 3 minutes, then turn it off.
Turn off the engine.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shif t the transmission or start the
engine (automatic transmission), your
vehicle must be transported with the
f ront wheels of f the ground.
With the front wheels on the ground,
do not tow the vehicle more than 50
miles (80 km), and keep the speed
below 35 mph (55 km/h).
07/06/28 20:47:24 31SAA610 0244 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,
mud, or snow, call a towing service
to pull it out (see page 238 ).
For very short distances, such as
freeing the vehicle, you can use the
detachable towing hook that mounts
on the anchor in the front bumper.
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
towing.
2. Lift the upper part of the cover
from the bumper by pushing the
lower part with your finger. Put a
cloth into the space behind the
upper part of the cover. Using the
extension, remove the cover fully.
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
239
Taking Care of the Unexpected
To use the towing hook:
1. Take the towing hook and the
extension out of the tool kit in the
cargo area.
07/06/28 20:47:29 31SAA610 0245 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
To avoid damage to your vehicle, use
the towing hook f or straight, f lat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. The tow hook should not be used
to tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Do
not use it as a tie down.
3. Screw the towing hook into the
bolt hole behind the bumper, then
tighten the hook securely with the
extension.
240
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:47:32 31SAA610 0246 Main Menu
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
Identification Numbers ................. 242
Specifications ................................. 244
DOT Tire Quality Grading
(U.S. Vehicles) ....................... 246
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading ................................... 246
Treadwear .................................. 246
Traction....................................... 246
Temperature .............................. 247
Tire Labeling .................................. 248
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) − Required Federal
Explanation............................. 249
241
Technical Information
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Emissions Controls........................ 251
The Clean Air Act ...................... 251
Crankcase Emissions Control
System..................................... 251
Evaporative Emissions Control
System..................................... 251
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ................................. 251
Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 252
PGM-FI System ..................... 252
Ignition Timing Control
System................................. 252
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 252
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 252
Replacement Parts..................... 252
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 253
Emissions Testing ......................... 254
07/06/28 20:47:36 31SAA610 0247 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers in various places.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
242
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:47:41 31SAA610 0248 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into
the front of the engine block.
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
ENGINE NUMBER
TRANSMISSION NUMBER
Technical Information
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
243
07/06/28 20:47:58 31SAA610 0249 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Specifications
Dimensions
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Front
Rear
Weights
Gross vehicle weight rating
Seating Capacities
Total
Front
Rear
Engine
Type
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Capacities
Fuel tank
157.4 in (3,999 mm)
66.2 in (1,682 mm)
60.0 in (1,524 mm)
96.5 in (2,450 mm)
57.3 in (1,456 mm)
57.1 in (1,451 mm)
Change*1
Including filter
Without filter
Total
Engine
Automatic
coolant
Transmission
Change*2
Total
Manual
Transmission
Change*2
Total
Automatic
Change
transmission Total
fluid
Manual
Change
transmission Total
fluid
Windshield
U.S. Vehicles
washer
Canada
reservoir
Vehicles
Approx.
10.8 US gal (41 )
Engine oil
See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
5
2
3
Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC
VTEC 4-cylinder gasoline engine
2.87 x 3.52 in (73.0 x 89.4 mm)
91.3 cu-in (1,497 cm )
10.4 : 1
IZFR6K-13 (NGK)
SKJ20DR-M13 (DENSO)
3.8 US qt (3.6 )
3.6 US qt (3.4 )
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
0.98 US gal (3.7 )
1.40 US gal (5.3 )
1.00 US gal (3.8 )
1.43 US gal (5.4 )
2.5 US qt (2.4 )
6.3 US qt (6.0 )
1.6 US qt (1.5 )
1.7 US qt (1.6 )
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
4.8 US qt (4.5 )
*1 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
*2 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity:
0.11 US gal (0.4 )
244
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:48:22 31SAA610 0250 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Specifications
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
HFC-134a (R-134a)
14.1−15.9 oz (400−450 g)
SP-10
Fuses
Interior
See page 236 or the fuse label
attached to the back of the driver’s
coin tray.
See page 237 or the fuse box
cover.
Under-hood
Lights
High/Low
Headlights
Front turn signal lights
Parking lights/side marker
lights
Fog lights
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/Taillights
Back-up lights
License plate lights
Ceiling light
Cargo area Light
Taillights
High-mount brake light
12 V − 60/55 W (HB2)
12 V − 21 W (Amber)
12 V − 5 W (Amber)
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
55 W (H11)
21 W (Amber)
21/5 W
21 W
3 CP
8W
5W
3 CP
21 W
Alignment
Toe-in
Caster
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Tires
Size
Front/Rear
Camber
Spare
Pressure
12 V − 32 AH/5 HR
12 V − 34 AH/5 HR
12 V − 40 AH/20 HR
Front
Rear
Spare
P175/65R14 81S *1
P195/55R15 84H *2
T115/70D14 88M *1
T125/70D14 93M *2
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
*1 : All models except Sport
*2 : Sport model
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
245
Technical Information
Battery
Capacity
0.0 in (0 mm)
0.10 in (2.5 mm)
0°
−1°30’
3°45’
07/06/28 20:48:30 31SAA610 0251 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and onehalf (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
246
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
07/06/28 20:48:34 31SAA610 0252 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
Technical Information
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
247
07/06/28 20:48:50 31SAA610 0253 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE
Tire Size
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Below is an example of
tire size with an explanation of what
each component means.
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example.
TIN is located on the sidewall of the
tire.
(1)
P195/55R15 84H
P
(4)
(1)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
248
(2)
Tire Size
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load
− Vehicle type (P indicates
passenger vehicle).
195 − Tire width in millimeters.
55 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
R − Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
15 − Rim diameter in inches.
84 − Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
H − Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
DOT −This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R −Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
FW6X −Tire type code.
2202 −Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
07/06/28 20:49:00 31SAA610 0254 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Tire Labeling, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Maximum Tire Pressure
Max Press − The maximum air
pressure the tire can hold.
Maximum Tire Load
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Max Load − The maximum load the
tire can carry at maximum air
pressure.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.
(If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
249
Technical Information
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) − Required Federal
Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.
07/06/28 20:49:05 31SAA610 0255 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is provided by
a separate telltale, which displays the
symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
250
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:49:13 31SAA610 0256 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several byproducts. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Controlling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contribute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The Clean Air Act
The United States Clean Air Act*
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
work and what to do to maintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
*
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
251
Technical Information
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
07/06/28 20:49:22 31SAA610 0257 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
PGM-FI System
The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection. It has three
subsystems: air intake, engine
control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM) in
automatic transmission vehicles or
the engine control module (ECM) in
manual transmission vehicles uses
various sensors to determine how
much air is going into the engine. It
252
then controls how much fuel to inject
under all operating conditions.
Ignition Timing Control System
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
(N2), and water vapor.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Replacement Parts
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work together in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
quality parts may increase the
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more information.
07/06/28 20:49:28 31SAA610 0258 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, backfiring, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s performance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
Technical Information
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
Keep the engine well maintained.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
253
07/06/28 20:49:36 31SAA610 0259 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
If you take your vehicle for an
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the onboard diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
1. Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
2. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F.
254
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in Park
(automatic transmission) or
neutral (manual transmission).
Increase the engine speed to 2,000
rpm, and hold it there until the
temperature gauge rises to at least
1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).
6. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, let the engine idle for 20
seconds.
07/06/28 20:49:41 31SAA610 0260 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Emissions Testing
7. Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D (automatic) or 5th (manual). Do
not use the cruise control. When
traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds
without moving the accelerator
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary
slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot
do this for a continuous 90
seconds because of traffic
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
9. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 30
minutes.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
Technical Information
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
255
07/06/28 20:49:43 31SAA610 0261 Main Menu
256
Table Of Contents
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:49:46 31SAA610 0262 Main Menu
Warranty and Customer Relations
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
257
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service Information..... 258
Warranty Coverages ..................... 259
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 260
Authorized Manuals ...................... 261
07/06/28 20:49:58 31SAA610 0263 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
Canadian Owners:
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Service Office.
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Mileage on your vehicle
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Your name, address, and telephone number
Customer Relations
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (787) 620-7546
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page 242 )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
Tel: (800) 999-1009
258
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:50:08 31SAA610 0264 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty − these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty − this warranty gives up
to 100 % credit toward a replacement
battery.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
− all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty −
Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for
details.
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty − covers all Honda
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty − provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty − provides
coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2008 Honda warranty information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2008 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.
259
Warranty and Customer Relations
New Vehicle Limited Warranty −
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.
07/06/28 20:50:12 31SAA610 0265 Main Menu
Table Of Contents
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
260
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.saf ercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.saf ercar.gov.
07/06/28 20:50:20 31SAA610 0266 Main Menu
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online:
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
Go online at www. helminc. com
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
Publication
Form Number
61SAA01
61SAA01EL
2008 Honda Fit Service Manual
2008 Honda Fit
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2008 Honda Fit Body Repair Manual
2008 Honda Fit Owner’s Manual
2008 Honda Fit Honda Service History
2008 Honda Fit Quick Start Guide
Order Form for Previous YearsIndicate Year and Model Desired
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
in your vehicle.
Body Repair Manual:
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
of damaged body parts.
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
261
Authorized Manuals
61SAA30
31SAA610
31SAAM10
31SAAQ10
HON-R
Form Description
Service Manual:
Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
07/06/28 20:50:23 31SAA610 0267 Main Menu
262
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:50:28 31SAA610 0268 Main Menu
Index
A
B
Battery
Charging System
Indicator............................ 60, 230
Jump Starting ............................. 226
Maintenance ............................... 214
Specifications ............................. 245
Before Driving ............................... 135
Belts, Seat ..................................... 8, 18
Beverage Holders ............................ 98
Booster Seats ................................... 50
Brakes
Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 168
Break-in, New Linings .............. 136
Bulb Replacement ..................... 201
Fluid ............................................ 195
Parking .......................................... 96
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
System Indicator .................. 60, 232
System Design ........................... 167
Wear Indicators ......................... 167
Braking System.............................. 167
Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 136
Brightness Control, Instruments ... 74
Brights, Headlights ................... 72, 73
Bulb Replacement
Back-up Lights ........................... 201
Brake Lights............................... 201
Front Parking Lights/
Front Side Marker Lights .... 198
Fog Lights .................................. 199
Headlights .................................. 196
High-mount Brake Light .......... 202
Specifications ............................. 245
Taillights ..................................... 201
Turn Signal Lights ............. 198, 201
Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 196
C
Capacities Chart............................. 244
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 53
CONTINUED
I
INDEX
Accessories..................................... 144
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
Position) ........................................ 78
Accessory Power Socket ................ 99
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 188
Adjusting the Steering Wheel ........ 75
Advanced Airbags............................ 27
Airbag (SRS) ................................ 9, 22
Air Conditioning System ............... 102
Usage .......................................... 103
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 210
Alcohol in Gasoline ........................ 136
Antifreeze ....................................... 190
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Indicator ................................ 62, 168
Operation .................................... 168
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 128
Anti-theft Steering Column Lock .. 78
Audio System ................................. 107
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 20
Automatic Speed Control.............. 131
Automatic Transmission............... 157
Capacity, Fluid ........................... 244
Checking Fluid Level ................ 193
Paddle Shifters ........................... 162
Shifting ........................................ 157
Shift Lever Position
Indicators ................................ 157
Shift Lever Positions ................. 158
Shift Lock Release ..................... 161
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 127
07/06/28 20:50:33 31SAA610 0269 Main Menu
Index
Cargo ............................................... 146
Cargo, How to Carry ..................... 146
Carrying Cargo .............................. 146
CAUTION, Explanation of .............. iii
CD Care .......................................... 124
CD Error Messages ...................... 123
CD Player........................................ 114
Center Pocket .................................. 97
Certification Label ......................... 242
Chains, Tires .................................. 214
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 219
Changing Oil .................................. 188
How to ......................................... 188
When to....................................... 179
Charging System Indicator .... 60, 230
Check Fuel Cap Indicator ............... 68
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 153
Child Safety ...................................... 34
Booster Seats ............................... 50
Child Seats .............................. 34, 41
Important Safety Reminders ...... 34
Infants ........................................... 39
Large Children ............................. 49
LATCH.......................................... 43
Risks with Airbags....................... 35
Small Children.............................. 40
II
Tethers.......................................... 47
Warning Labels ............................ 36
Where Should a Child Sit? .......... 35
Child Seats .................................. 34, 41
LATCH.......................................... 43
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 47
Childproof Door Locks ................... 80
Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 203
Cleaning the Wheels ..................... 208
Clock ............................................... 129
Clutch Fluid .................................... 195
CO in the Exhaust ......................... 251
Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 154
Consumer Information*................ 258
Controls, Instruments and .............. 57
Coolant
Adding ......................................... 190
Checking ..................................... 140
Proper Solution .......................... 190
Temperature Indicator................ 63
Crankcase Emissions Control
System......................................... 251
Cruise Control Indicator ................. 65
Cruise Control Operation ............. 131
Cup Holders...................................... 98
Customer Service Office .............. 258
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
D
DANGER, Explanation of ................ iii
Dashboard .................................... 3, 58
Daytime Running Lights**............. 73
Daytime Running Lights
Indicator** .................................... 65
Dead Battery .................................. 226
Defects, Reporting Safety............. 260
Defogger, Rear Window ................. 74
Defrosting the Windows ............... 105
Detachable Anchor .......................... 93
Dimensions ..................................... 244
Dimming the Headlights .......... 72, 73
Dipstick
Automatic Transmission........... 193
Engine Oil ................................... 139
Directional Signals ........................... 72
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 167
Disc Care ........................................ 124
Disc Player Error Messages ........ 123
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 189
Doors
Childproof Door Locks ............... 80
Locking and Unlocking ............... 79
Power Door Locks ....................... 79
07/06/28 20:50:38 31SAA610 0270 Main Menu
Index
DOT Tire Quality Grading* ......... 246
Downshifting, Manual
Transmission .............................. 155
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5
Driving ............................................ 151
Economy ..................................... 141
Driving Guidelines ......................... 152
Driving with the Paddle
Shifters ........................................ 162
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 205
E
F
Fan, Interior.................................... 103
Features .......................................... 101
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 137
Filters
Dust and Pollen .......................... 205
Oil ................................................ 188
Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 74
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 219
Fluids
Automatic Transmission........... 193
Brake ........................................... 195
Clutch .......................................... 195
Manual Transmission ............... 194
Windshield Washer ................... 192
Folding the Rear Seat Down .......... 91
Folding the Rear Seat Up................ 90
Four-way Flashers ........................... 74
Front Airbags ............................... 9, 25
Front Seat
Adjusting ....................................... 86
Airbags ...................................... 9, 25
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
III
INDEX
Economy, Fuel ............................... 141
Emergencies................................... 217
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 226
Brake System Indicator ............ 232
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 219
Charging System Indicator ...... 230
Checking the Fuses................... 234
Hazard Warning Flashers .......... 74
Jump Starting ............................. 226
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 230
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 231
Overheated Engine ................... 228
Towing ........................................ 238
Emergency Brake ............................ 96
Emergency Flashers ....................... 74
Emergency Towing ....................... 238
Emissions Controls........................ 251
Emissions Testing ......................... 254
Engine
Adding Engine Coolant ............. 190
Coolant Temperature
Indicator .................................... 63
If It Won’t Start .......................... 224
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp ....................................... 231
Oil Life ........................................ 179
Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 60, 230
Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 187
Overheating................................ 228
Specifications ............................. 244
Speed Limiter ..................... 156, 160
Starting........................................ 154
Ethanol in Gasoline ....................... 136
Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 251
Exhaust Fumes ................................ 53
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Belts by ......................................... 16
07/06/28 20:50:43 31SAA610 0271 Main Menu
Index
Fuel .................................................. 136
Check Fuel Cap Indicator ........... 68
Fill Door and Cap....................... 137
Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 62
Gauge ............................................ 68
Octane Requirement ................. 136
Oxygenated ................................ 136
Tank, Refueling ......................... 137
Fuel Economy ................................ 141
Fuses, Checking the ...................... 234
G
Gas Mileage, Improving................ 141
Gasohol ........................................... 136
Gasoline .......................................... 136
Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 62
Gauge ............................................ 68
Octane Requirement ................. 136
Tank, Refueling ......................... 137
Gas Station Procedures................. 137
Gauges
Fuel ................................................ 68
Gearshift Lever Positions
Automatic Transmission........... 158
Manual Transmission ............... 155
IV
Glove Box ......................................... 98
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) ...................................... 148
H
Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 196
Hazard Warning Flashers............... 74
Headlights
Aiming ......................................... 196
Daytime Running Lights** ........ 73
High Beam Indicator ................... 65
Reminder Chime .......................... 73
Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 196
Turning on .................................... 73
Head Restraints ............................... 87
Heating and Cooling ...................... 102
High Beam Lever............................. 73
Hood, Opening the ........................ 138
Horn............................................... 4, 70
Hydraulic Clutch ............................ 195
I
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 242
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Ignition
Keys............................................... 76
Switch ............................................ 78
Timing Control System ............. 252
Immobilizer System......................... 77
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
07/06/28 20:50:49 31SAA610 0272 Main Menu
Index
SRS .......................................... 30, 61
TPMS* .................................. 64, 171
Turn Signal and Hazard
Warning .................................... 63
Washer Level ............................... 65
Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 59
Infant Restraint ................................ 39
Infant Seats ....................................... 39
Tether Anchorage Point ............. 47
Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 209
Recommended Pressures ......... 210
Inside Mirror .................................... 95
Inspection, Tire .............................. 210
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 42
Instrument Panel ............................. 59
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 74
Instruments and Controls ............... 57
Interior Lights .................................. 99
Introduction ......................................... i
J
Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 221
Jack, Tire ........................................ 219
Jump Starting ................................. 226
K
Keys ................................................... 76
L
Label, Certification ........................ 242
Lane Change, Signaling .................. 72
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 14, 19
LATCH Anchorage System............ 43
Lights
Bulb Replacement ..................... 196
Indicator ........................................ 59
Parking .......................................... 72
Turn Signal ................................... 72
Load Limits..................................... 147
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....... 78
Locks
Anti-theft Steering Column ........ 78
Childproof Door ........................... 80
Power Door .................................. 79
Tailgate ......................................... 81
Low Coolant Level ......................... 140
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 62
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
V
INDEX
Indicators
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake)....... 62, 168
Brake (Parking and Brake
System) ............................. 60, 232
Charging System ................. 60, 230
Check Fuel Cap............................ 68
Cruise Control .............................. 65
Door and Tailgate Open ............. 62
DRL (Daytime Running
Lights)**................................... 65
EPS (Electric Power Steering) .. 62
Fog Light ...................................... 64
High Beam.................................... 65
High Temperature ....................... 63
Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 66
Lights On ...................................... 64
Low Fuel ....................................... 62
Low Oil Pressure ................. 60, 230
Low Temperature ........................ 63
Low Tire Pressure* ............. 64, 170
Maintenance Minder........... 66, 179
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 231
Passenger Airbag Off .................. 31
Seat Belt Reminder ............... 18, 60
Security System ........................... 66
Side Airbag Off ...................... 31, 61
07/06/28 20:50:55 31SAA610 0273 Main Menu
Index
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 60, 230
Lower Anchors................................. 43
Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 244
Luggage, Storing (Cargo) ............ 146
Luggage Net (Cargo Net) ............ 150
M
Maintenance ................................... 177
Main Items and Sub Items ....... 182
Minder......................................... 179
Minder Indicator .......................... 66
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks .................................... 184
Safety........................................... 178
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 231
Manual Transmission.................... 155
Checking Fluid Level ................ 194
Shifting ........................................ 155
Manual Transmission Fluid ......... 194
Meters, Gauges.......................... 59, 67
Methanol in Gasoline .................... 136
Mirrors, Adjusting ........................... 95
Modifying Your Vehicle................ 144
VI
Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 136
N
Neutral Gear Position.................... 159
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 136
Normal Shift Speeds...................... 156
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i
Numbers, Identification ................ 242
O
Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 136
Odometer .......................................... 68
Odometer, Trip ................................ 67
Oil
Change, How to ......................... 188
Change, When to ....................... 179
Checking Engine ....................... 139
Pressure Indicator ............... 60, 230
Selecting Proper Viscosity
Chart ....................................... 187
ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 78
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ..................................... 251
Outside Mirrors ............................... 95
Overheating, Engine ..................... 228
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 184
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
P
Paddle Shifters ............................... 162
Panel Brightness Control ............... 74
Park Gear Position......................... 158
Parking ............................................ 166
Parking Brake .................................. 96
Parking Brake and Brake
System Indicator .................. 60, 232
Parking Lights.................................. 72
Parking Over Things that Burn ... 166
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ..... 31
PGM-FI System.............................. 252
Pollen Filter .................................... 205
Power Door Locks ........................... 79
Power Socket Location ................... 99
Power Windows ............................... 94
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 16
Preparing to Drive ......................... 153
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
Additional Safety Precautions .... 17
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16
07/06/28 20:51:01 31SAA610 0274 Main Menu
Index
Protecting Children ......................... 34
Protecting Infants ........................ 39
Protecting Larger Children ........ 49
Protecting Small Children .......... 40
Using Child Seats with
Tethers...................................... 47
Using LATCH .............................. 43
R
S
Safety Belts................................... 8, 18
Safety Defects, Reporting* .......... 260
Safety Features .................................. 7
Airbags ............................................ 9
Seat Belts ........................................ 8
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 54
Safety Messages ............................... iii
Seat Belts ...................................... 8, 18
Additional Information ................ 18
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 20
Cleaning ...................................... 203
Detachable Anchor...................... 93
Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 14, 19
Maintenance ................................. 20
Reminder Indicator and
Beeper ................................. 18, 60
System Components.................... 18
Use During Pregnancy................ 16
Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt .... 14
Seats, Adjusting the ......................... 86
Select/Reset Knob .......................... 67
Serial Number ................................ 242
Service Intervals ............................ 179
Service Manual* ............................ 261
Service Station Procedures .......... 137
Setting the Clock ........................... 129
Shift Lever Position Indicators .... 157
Shift Lock Release ......................... 161
CONTINUED
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
VII
INDEX
Radiator Overheating .................... 228
Radio/CD Sound System .............. 107
Radio Theft Protection.................. 128
Readiness Codes ............................ 231
Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 201
Rear Seat, Folding ..................... 90, 91
Rear View Mirror ............................. 95
Rear Window Defogger .................. 74
Rear Window Wiper and Washer .. 71
Reclining the Seat Backs ................ 87
Recommended Shift Speeds ........ 156
Refueling ......................................... 137
Reminder Indicators ........................ 59
Remote Transmitter ........................ 83
Replacement Information
Dust and Pollen Filter ............... 205
Engine Oil and Filter ................. 188
Fuses ........................................... 233
Light Bulbs ................................. 196
Schedule ..................................... 185
Tires ............................................ 212
Wiper Blades .............................. 205
Replacing Seat Belts After a
Crash ............................................. 21
Reporting Safety Defects* ........... 260
Reserve Tank, Engine
Coolant ................................ 140, 190
Restraint, Child ................................ 34
Reverse Gear Position................... 159
Reverse Lockout ............................ 161
Rotation, Tire ................................. 212
07/06/28 20:51:05 31SAA610 0275 Main Menu
Index
Side Airbags ................................. 9, 28
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 28
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 31
Side Curtain Airbags ................... 9, 30
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 30
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
Replacement ............................... 198
Signaling Turns ................................ 72
Snow Tires ...................................... 213
Sound System ................................. 107
Spare Tire ....................................... 218
Spark Plugs ..................................... 244
Specifications ......................... 244, 245
Speed Control ................................. 131
Speed Limiter ......................... 156, 160
SRS, Additional Information........... 22
Additional Safety Precautions .... 33
Airbag Service .............................. 32
Airbag System Components ....... 22
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 31
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 30
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 25
VIII
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 28
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 30
SRS Indicator.............................. 30, 61
START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 78
Starting the Engine........................ 154
In Cold Weather at High
Altitude ................................... 154
With a Dead Battery ................. 226
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 228
Steering Wheel
Adjustment ................................... 75
Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 78
Steering Wheel Buttons ................ 131
Stereo Sound System .................... 107
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 216
Sun Visor........................................... 99
Supplemental Restraint
System................................... 9, 22
Servicing ....................................... 32
SRS Indicator.......................... 30, 61
System Components.................... 22
Synthetic Oil ................................... 188
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
T
Tailgate
Open Indicator ............................. 62
Opening the .................................. 81
Taillights, Changing Bulbs ........... 201
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 217
Technical Descriptions
DOT Tire Quality Grading* ..... 246
Emissions Control Systems ...... 251
Oxygenated Fuels...................... 136
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ................................ 253
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) − Required
Federal Explanation .......... 249
Temperature Indicator .................... 63
Tether Anchorage Points ............... 47
Theft Protection, Radio................. 128
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 253
Tilt the Steering Wheel................... 75
Time, Setting the ........................... 129
Tire Chains ..................................... 214
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 219
Tire Information ............................ 248
07/06/28 20:51:11 31SAA610 0276 Main Menu
Index
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
Automatic ............................... 193
Checking Fluid Level,
Manual .................................... 194
Fluid Selection ................... 193, 194
Identification Number............... 243
Shifting the Automatic .............. 157
Shifting the Manual ................... 155
Treadwear ...................................... 246
Trip Meter ........................................ 67
Turn Signals ..................................... 72
U
Unexpected, Taking Care
of the ........................................... 217
Uniform Tire Quality Grading* ... 246
Unleaded Gasoline......................... 136
Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 189
V
Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 147
Vehicle Dimensions....................... 244
Vehicle Identification Number..... 242
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Storage .............................. 216
Ventilation ...................................... 104
VIN .................................................. 242
Viscosity, Oil................................... 187
W
WARNING, Explanation of ............. iii
Warning Labels, Location of .......... 54
Warranty Coverages* ................... 259
Washers, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 192
Fluid Level Indicator** ............... 65
Operation ...................................... 71
Wheels
Adjusting the Steering ................ 75
Alignment and Balance ............. 212
Aluminum Alloy Wheels ........... 208
Cleaning ...................................... 208
Wrench, Nut ............................... 221
Windows
Auto Down .................................... 94
Operating the Power ................... 94
Rear, Defogger ............................ 74
IX
INDEX
Tires ................................................ 208
Air Pressure ............................... 210
Chains ......................................... 214
Checking Wear .......................... 210
DOT Tire Quality Grading* ..... 246
Inflation ....................................... 209
Inspection ................................... 210
Labeling ...................................... 248
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator*.......................... 64, 170
Maintenance ............................... 211
Pressure Monitoring
System*................................... 170
Replacing .................................... 212
Rotating....................................... 212
Snow ............................................ 213
Specifications ............................. 245
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 219
Towing
A Trailer ...................................... 173
Emergency Wrecker ................. 238
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System)* ................................. 170
Indicator*.............................. 64, 171
Required Federal
Explanation............................. 249
07/06/28 20:51:15 31SAA610 0277 Main Menu
Index
Windshield
Cleaning ........................................ 71
Defroster .................................... 105
Washers ...................................... 192
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 205
Operation ...................................... 71
Worn Tires ..................................... 210
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 238
*
**
X
: U.S. only
: Canada only
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:51:17 31SAA610 0278 Main Menu
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:51:19 31SAA610 0279 Main Menu
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:51:21 31SAA610 0280 Main Menu
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:51:34 31SAA610 0281 Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher.
Fuel Tank Capacity:
10.8 US gal (41 )
Recommended Engine Oil:
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page 187 ).
Manual Transmission Fluid:
Honda Manual Transmission
Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30
or 10W-40 motor oil as a
temporary replacement (see page
194 ).
Capacity (including differential):
1.6 US qt (1.5 )
Brake Fluid:
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page 195 ).
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Front/Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Spare Tire Pressure:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
3.8 US qt (3.6 )
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) (see page
193 ).
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
07/06/28 20:15:39 31SAA610 0001 Main Menu
Owner’s Identification
This owner’s manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
OWNER
This owner’s manual covers all models of
the Fit. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular vehicle.
ADDRESS
STREET
CITY
STATE/PROVINCE
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME
DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
STREET
CITY
STATE/PROVINCE
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
2008 Fit
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votre concessionnaire de
commander le numéro de pièce
33SAAC10
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement